Introduction
Lvngsø Marine À/S
System Overview
Functional Description
Panel Operation Description
DMS Panel Alarm and Maintenance
Functions
Trouble Shooting with Alarm Description & actual Alarm Channel Print-out
Customising Tool Print-out of I/O-list,
Output Functions, Function Blocks etc.
DMS Components, Module Lay-out
with Jumper Set-up & Spare Part List
Wiring Diagram
USER MANUAL
,
Guangzhou
g
I
Operating Panels
10
Control Cabinet
11
ECR Indicating Panel
12
Local Control Instrument box for
Emergency Control Stand
13
Tacho Pick-Up and Junction box
14
Tacho Instruments etc.
15
Others
16
Telegraph Order Printer
17
Engine Order Telegraph
18
Delivery Extent List
19
List of Lyngsø Marine Service Stations
20
>
Lyngsø Marine A/S
DMS2100/
Bridge Manoeuvring System
MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
User Manual
IMO 9340582
GSI 03130011
Doc. No.: 970.125.212
Lyngsø Marine A/S
Lyngsø Allé
DK-2970 Hørsholm
Denmark
Telephone: +45 4516 62 00
'Telefax:— - +45 4516 62 62
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100É
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 1 of 98
2002.07.12
Contents
SUBJECT INDEX
4
1.
6
DMS2100/INTRODUCTION
1.1
REFERENCES
8
1.2
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
8
DMS2100/ SYSTEM OVERVIEW
10
2.
2.1
DMS PANELS FOR REMOTE CONTROL
2.1.1
DMS Panel Functions
11
12
2.2
THE ECR SUB PANEL
18
2.3
THE LOCAL CONTROL Box
21
2.4
SAFETY SYSTEM FOR THE MAIN ENGINE
23
2.5
MAIN ENGINE SPEED MEASUREMENT
24
2.6
TELEGRAPH TRANSMITTER AND RPM SETPOINT CONTROL
2.6.1
Electrical Shaft System
2.6.1.1
2.6.2
3.
Bridge Centre and Wings Control Transfer
24
24
25
Emergency Telegraph System
25
DMS2100/FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
26
3.1
C O N T R O L CHANGE-OVER
3.1.1
Control Position Change-over by Request from the Bridge.
3.1.2
From Bridge Control to ECR Control
3.1.3
Control Position Changeover by Request from E.C.R
3.1.4
From ECR Control to Bridge Control
3.1.5
Forced Changeover from Bridge Control to ECR Control
3.1.6
Telegraph Levers Alignment
3.1.7
Cable Failure on Telegraph Levers
3.1.8
Local Emergency Control
3.1.9
Local/Remote Control Transfer
3.1.10 Local/Remote Control Transfer to Bridge
3.2 SUBTELEGRAPH
3.2.1
Conditions for Finished With Engine
3.2.2
Conditions for Standby
3.2.3
Conditions for Sea Mode
3.3
M A I N ENGINE START/STOP
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.4
3.5
3.6
Automatic Bridge Control
Manual ECR Control
Start blockings
Reversing
Slow turning
2-stroke Start/Stop
Crash Stop
Repeated Start
M A I N ENGINE SHUTDOWN
M A I N ENGINE SLOWDOWN
SETPOINT SYSTEM
3.6.1
Setpoint lever adjustments
3.6.2
Main Engine RPM Governor Setpoint
3.6.2.1 Constant RPM Setpoint
3.6.2.2 PTO Minimum RPM
3.6.2.3 Panel Fine Adjustment of RPM
3.6.2.4 PMS Fine Adjustment for Frequency Control
970.125.212
26
27
28
28
28
29
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
32
32
33
33
35
35
36
36
36
37
37
38
39
41
42
42
42
42
43
43
p Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
3.6.2.5
3.6.2.6
3.6.2.7
3.6.2.8
3.6.2.9
3.6.2.10
3.6.2.11
4.
Page 2 of 98
2002.07.12
Slowdown RPM Setpoint
Shaft Generator Waiting Station Hold
RPM Setpoint Slope
Maintain Speed Function
Critical Speed Protection
Speed-Droop Compensation of Setpoint
Governor Output Scaling
43
43
44
44
44
44
45
DMS2000/ PANEL OPERATION DESCRIPTION
4.1
4.2
46
CONTROL RIGHT FOR DMS CONTROL FUNCTIONS
BASIC MODE OVERVIEW DISPLAY ON DMS PANEL
4.2.1
4.2.2
A3
46
47
Setpoint System Alignment
Other DMS Panel Indications
48
48
OPERATION FROM DMS PANEL
48
4.3.1
Select of Machine Control Groups
4.3.2
Main Engine Start/Stop Operation
4.3.2.1 Main Engine Start/Stop Status List
4.3.2.2 Main Engine Start/Stop Adjustments
4.3.3
Select Main Engine Control Functions
4.3.3.1 Main Engine Setpoint Fineadjust
4.3.3.2 Main Engine Setpoint Fineadjust Status
4.3.3.3 Max RPM Limit Adjustment
4.3.3.4 Max RPM Limit Adjustment Status
4.3.3.5 ME Tacho Selector
4.3.3.6 ME Tacho System Status List
4.3.4
Shaft Generator Interface
4.3.5
DMS Panel Status Lists
4.3.5.1 Main Engine Governor Interface
4.3.5.2 Main Engine Startblockings List
4.3.5.3 Main Engine Shutdown List
4.3.5.4 Main Engine Slowdown List
4.3.5.5 ME Setpoint System Status List
4.3.5.6 DMS2100/Sub-Telegraph Status List
4.3.5.7 Load Controller Status List
4.3.6
Input/Output Adjustments
4.3.6.1 Adjustment of Governor Output
4.3.6.2 Adjustment of RPM Telegraph Levers
4.3.6.3 RPM Setpoint Adjustment Status List
5.
48
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
52
53
53
54
_....5J
55
56
57
57
58
59
60
61
61
62
62
DMS2100/PANEL ALARM AND MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
BASICMODE
HARD - AND SOFTKEY OVERVIEW
ALARM LIST MODE
ADDITIONAL LIST MODE
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
The Text Entry Screen
The Stepping/status Screen
Channel Status Screen
The Entry Selection Screen
ADJUST CHANNEL MODE
5.6.1
5.7
Selecting the List Type.
At the List Level
DISPLAY CHANNEL MODE
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.6
63
Entering of Numerical Data and Texts
MAINTENANCE MODE
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
Display Time and Date
View Program Version, Load Sequential Date and Number
Set Time and Date (priv. access level 1)
Lamp Test
970.125.212
63
64
65
67
'.
68
69
70
70
71
71
72
73
75
76
77
77
78
80
P Lyngsø Marine
.Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 3 of 98
2002.07.12
>
5.7.5
Select UTC or Local Time (priv. access level 1)
5.7.6
Enter Commissioning Mode (priv. access level 4)
5.7.7
Change Password - Level N (priv. access level N/N+l)
5.7.8
Enter System Password Level (priv. access level 4)
5.7.9
Select LOP-UCS Control
5.7.10 Watch Dog Activation (priv. access level 4)
5.7.11 Store Setup (priv. access level 4)
5.8
DIMMERMODE
81
81
81
82
82
83
83
84
6.
DMS2100J ALARM INDICATION AND TROUBLE SHOOTING
85
7.
DMS21007 CUSTOMISING TOOL PRINT-OUT
95
INPUT/OUTPUT LIST TERMINAL BOARD REPORT
OUTPUT FUNCTIONS LIST REPORT
DMS2100/FUNCTION BLOCKS LIST REPORT
95
96
97
7.1
7.2
73
8.
DMS2100/ COMPONENTS AND SPARE-PARTS
8.1
8.2
8.3
HARDWARE COMPONENTS LIST
HW MODULES LAYOUT AND JUMPER SETTINGS
SPARE-PART LIST
970.125.212
98
98
99
100
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 4 of 98
2002.07.12
Subject Index
Many of the entries in the subject index are the exact DMS ALARM TEXT appearing at the Operating Panels on the Bridge and in the ECR.
Additional List
Adjust Channel
Adjustment
Fineadjust RPM Setpoint
Governor Output
Max RPM Limit
Reversing Level
RPM Telegraph Levers
Start Level Ahead
Start Level Astern
Autom. Supply (IFM401) FUSE Fl
16,65
16,37,71
49, 50
59
50
48
60
48
48
83
B
Bridge Telegraph El-shaft fail
83
C
Crashstop
Critical Speed
35
42,45, 86
JD
Dimmer
12,16, 61, 82
Display Channel
16, 37, 68
DMS System Malfunction
83
DMS1T01 Pickup 1 fail
83
DMS1T01 Pickup 2 fail
83
DMS-Alarm Syst. Interface Fail
84
DMS-EGS2000 Interface Fail
84
DPS
OVERSPEED
55
DPS2100
6, 8, 10, 14,21, 36, 96
ECR Sub Panel
10, 17
EGS2000
6, 8,15,43,45, 51, 58, 59, 84, 85, 96
Finished With Engine
13,29, 31, 57
G
GAMMAx
Alarm Net
Comm. To PCS Panel 1
Comm. To PCS Panel 2
Database Status
GAMMA y
STL Net to GAMMA x
970.125.212
84
84
84
84
84
Governor Cancel Limits
Governor Failure
Governor Setpoint
Governor Speedsetting Error
Governor Stop
35, 85
85
40, 53
85
34, 35, 84, 85
Limits Cancel
0, 15, 34, 35,42, 53, 85, 87
Local Control
8, 10,19, 20, 28,47
Local Control Box
10,19,20
LPtest Supply (IFM401) FUSE F4
85
M
Maintenance
16, 37, 61, 74, 80, 81
Manual Control
25, 36
Manual Slowdown, Reduce RPM
85
Manual Supply (1FM401) FUSE F2
85
ME Ahead Valve Failure
85
ME Astern Valve Failure
85
ME BRG TLG CMD
85
ME BRG TLG CMD Failure
85
ME BRG TLG Misaligned
85
ME Control position fail
86
ME Critical Speed Range 1
86
ME Critical Speed Range 2
86
ME DPS
Emergency Stop
86
Overspeed Shutdown
86
ME ECR TLG CMD
86
ME ECR TLG CMD Failure
86
ME ECR TLG Misaligned
87
ME EMG TLG CMD Failure
87
ME Limits Cancelled
87
ME Max No Start Exceeded
87
ME Mechanical Shutdown alarm 1
87
ME Mechanical Shutdown alarm 2
87
ME Mechanical Shutdown alarm 3
87
ME Mechanical Shutdown alarm 4
87
ME NON Cancellable Shutdown
87
ME NON Cancellable Slowdown
87
ME Repeated Start
87
ME Shutdown Active
87
ME Shutdown Cancelled
88
ME Shutdown input alarm 1
88
ME Shutdown input alarm 2
88
ME Shutdown input alarm 3
88
ME Shutdown input alarm 4
88
ME Shutdown input alarm 5
88
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 5 of98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
ME Shutdown input alarm 6
ME Shutdown input alarm 7
ME Shutdown input alarm 8
ME Shutdown input alarm 9
ME Shutdown Prewarning
ME Slowdown Active
ME Slowdown Cancelled
ME Slowdown input 1
ME Slowdown input 10
ME Slowdown input 11
ME Slowdown input 12
ME Slowdown input 13
ME Slowdown input 14
ME Slowdown input 4
ME Slowdown input 5
ME Slowdown input 6
ME Slowdown input 7
ME Slowdown input 8
ME Slowdown input 9
ME Slowdown Prewarning
ME Slowtuming Fail
ME Slowtuming Valve Failure
ME Stair distrib. AH 1 Valve
ME Stair distrib. AH 2 Valve
ME Stair distrib. AS 1 Valve
ME Stair distrib. AS 2 Valve
ME StAir Pressure Low
ME StAir Transmitter failure
ME Start Air Time Exceeded
ME Start Block Cancelled
ME Start Blocked
ME Start Valve Failure
ME Stop Valve Failure
ME Tacho 1 Error
ME Tacho 2 Error
970.125.212
88
88
88
88
88
88
88
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
89
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
91
91
Module DMS1AI01 (AEM402) Error
Module DMS1C001 (SIO) Error
Module DMS1C002 (SIO) Error
Module DMS1C003 (DSN) Error
Module DMS1M101 (IOM402) Error
Module DMS1M101 (IOM402) Fuse
Module DMS1M102 (REM401) Error _
Module DMS1M102 (REM401) Fuse
Module DMS1M103 (REM401) Error
Module DMS1M103 (REM401) Fuse
Module DMS1M104 (AAM401) Error
MSB
PTO
91
91
91
91
91
91
„
91
92
92
92
92
9,41,49
6, 9,40, 41, 52
S
Sea Mode
13, 29,30, 57
Sensor Supply (IFM401) FUSE F3
92
Shaftgenerator
6, 9, 10, 40, 41,46, 49, 52, 56
Shutdown... 6, 9,14, 19, 20, 21, 33, 36, 37,41,46, 55,
86, 87, 88
Slowdown... 6, 9,10,14,15, 31, 37, 38, 40,41, 45,46,
53, 55, 85, 87, 88, 89
Slowturn
18,45, 47
Standby
29, 30, 57
Start blocking
15, 33,47, 53, 54
Start Failure Alarm Output
92
Stop Horn
15, 36, 37
U
UCS2100
UMS2100
UTC time
6, 8, 10, 84, 91, 96
6, 8, 15, 16, 65, 66, 67, 80, 84
69, 72, 74, 75, 76, 77, 79
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 6 of 98
2002.07.12
1. DMS2100/Introduction
The Diesel Manoeuvring System - DMS2100z is a Bridge Manoeuvring System used for remote control of a ship's Propulsion Line, with a two-stroke low speed Main Engine connected
to a Fixed Pitch Propeller (FPP).
The DMS2100z is operated by means of Telegraph Levers and standard DMS2100* Panels
with build in four-line display.
The DMS2100z is operated as a completely independent stand-alone system, with all information and internal alarms displayed on the DMS Operator Panels.
When the DMS2100z are delivered together with a Lyngsø Marine Universal Monitoring System, UMS2100 alarm system or as an integrated part of the Universal Control System
UCS2100, the systems can be interconnected by means of a communication network, so that
alarms, indications and measurements values from the DMS2100/ can be displayed on the
Graphical Operator Station (GOS) and alarm Panels in the Alarm and Control System also.
The DMS2100z can be configured to provide complete control for:
»
Main Engine Start/Stop System
•
Start Blocking indications
•
Main Engine Setpoint System
•
Main Engine Shutdown Indications from ME Safety System
•
Main Engine Slowdown System
•
Main Engine Speed Measurement and Indication
•
Control Transfer for Bridge/ECR/Local Change-over
•
Sub-telegraph with Finished With Engine (FWE), Stand-by and Sea-mode
•
Serial Interface to EGS2000 Electronic Governor
•
Alarm Announcement and Indication
The DMS2100z" can be extended with the following options:
•
DPS2100 Engine Safety System (independent system for Shutdowns and overspeed)
•
Interface to PTO connected Shaft Generator (SG Waiting Station)
•
Bridge Wing Control (Wing Panels Optional) and Electric Shaft on Telegraph Levers
•
Communication Telegraph System for Bridge order communication to ECR/Local
•
Manoeuvring Order Printer integrated in the system
•
Integration with Lyngsø Marine Alarm and Control System
•
Serial interface (Modbus) to other types of ships alarm system
This User Manual gives an overview of the hardware and describes the functionality of the
DMS2100z Bridge Manoeuvring System, and includes wiring diagrams etc.
Also the Monitoring and Control System, the Safety System, the Telegraph Lever System with
Electric Shaft for the Bridge Wings and other related system and options are described to give
a complete overview of the remote control system.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Page 7 of98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
stop
* S t a r t ATlacjio EG32000 Actuator
Pickups
Engine C ontrol Rcxm
* Local RcrteTslve Box *Switchçs
* = Y a rd Supply * * = O p t i o n
Figure 1: Bridge Manoeuvring System, DMS2100i layout.
970.125.212
}
Lyngsø Marine
Page 8 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
1.1 References
[1] Propulsion Control System, PCS2100, System Description
[2] Diesel Protection System, DPS2100, System Description and User Manual
[3] Universal Monitoring System, UMS2100, System Description and User Manual
[4] Universal Control System, UCS2100, System Description and User Manual
[5] Electronic Governor System, EGS2000, System Description and User Manual
1.2 Definitions
AAM
AEM
AI-CB
AI
AO
BAP
BRG
BT
CPP
DG
DI
DO
DMS
DNM
DPS
DSN
DZM
ECR
EGS
EMG
ENT
ER
ESC
ESS
EXH
FIM 405
FPP
GOS
I/O
I/P
IOM
LC
LCD
LED
LOP
LP
LM
MAM
970.125.212
and Abbreviations
Analog Output Module type 401
Analog Input Module type 402
Analog Input Connection Board (in EGS2000)
Analog Input
Analog Output
Basic Alarm Panel
Bridge
Bow Thruster
Controllable Pitch Propeller
Diesel Generator
Digital Input
Digital Output
Diesel Manoeuvring System - Bridge Manoeuvring System
Dual STELLA NET communication interface Module
Diesel Protection System - Engine Safety System
Dual STELLA NET communication interface
DrehZahl relais Module - speed relay module type 402
Engine Control Room
Electronic Governor System
Emergency
Enter key
Engine Room
Escape key
Engine Safety System
Exhaust
Filter Module for 24 Vdc Power Supply
Fixed Pitch Propeller
Graphic Operator Station
Input/Output
Current to Pressure converter
Input Output Module - type 402
Local Control
Liquid Crystal Display
Light Emitting Diode
Local Operator Panel
Lowpass Filter
Lyngsø Marine
MIC40 Input/Output Adapter, Gamma to digital I/O modules
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100i
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
ME
MEP
MIC40
MSB
MXM
NA
PCC
PCS
PLC
PMS
PS
PTO
REM
RPM
SB
SG
SHD
SIM
SIO
SLD
ST
TAM
TC
UPS
UMS
UCS
VIC/T
970.125.212
Page 9 of98
2002.07.12
Main Engine
Mean Effective Cylinder Pressure
Input/Output Adapter, Gamma to digital I/O modules
Main Switch Board
Multiplexer Module type 402 (16 channel analog input)
Not Applicable
Propulsion Control Cabinet
Propulsion Control System
Programmable Logic Controller - Gamma computer
Power Management System - ships generator control system
Port Side
Power Take Off
Binary input and relay output module type 401
Rotations Per Minute
Star Board side
Shaft Generator
Shutdown
Serial Input/Output Interface Module
Serial Input/Output Communication
Slowdown
Stern Thruster
Tacho Adapter Module type 401
Turbo Charger
Uninterruptable Power Supply
Universal Monitoring System - ships alarm system
Universal Control System- ships alarm and control system
Variable Injection Control/Timing
arine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 10 of 98
2002.07.12
2. DMS2100/System Overview
The DMS2100z control functions for a Propulsion Line existing of a MAN B&W 2-stroke
Slow-speed Engine with Fixed Pitch Propeller are handled by one DMS2100/ Gamma PLC
mounted in the DMS control cabinet, together with the units for a DPS2100 Engine Safety
System.
The Main Engine Safety System is completely independent of the DMS. The Main Engine
may be equipped with a standard Safety System from the Main Engine manufacturer. If the
Main Engine manufacturer supply does not include a Safety System, the DMS can be delivered together with an independent Diesel Protection System, DPS2100 Safety System.
The alarm and monitoring part of the machinery components controlled by the DMS2100/ are
handled by other Gamma PLC's in the UMSAJCS2100 Alarm and Control System.
In case that alarms from the Main Engine are connected to the DMS Gamma, it must be
alarms relevant for the Main Engine controlled by that particular DMS Gamma only, because
they will be displayed as DMS alarms on the DMS Panels, such as e.g. alarms initiating a
Slowdown/load reduction, startblockings etc.
The DMS2100z and the UCS2100 Alarm and Control system are independent systems, each
with its own Gamma PLC's, only connected by a network to transfer alarms and information
to the GOS and printers (Manoeuvring Order Printer). The network will also be used for
automatic operation of the Power Management System (PMS) e.g. in case of mode change
to/from a mode where the SG is connected to a Bow Thruster (BT) and/or Stem Thruster
(ST).
Slowdowns for the Main Engine and optional RPM up/down signals from the Power Management System (for frequency control, load sharing and synchronising purposes) are transferred as hardwired signal lines for safety reasons. The Slowdown inputs to the DMS2100/ are
defined as supervised inputs, i.e. cable break can be detected.
All hardware component and logic circuitry of the DMS2100z and the UCS2100 Alarm and
Control System is independent. That means it will still be possible to control the propulsion
machinery even in case of a total breakdown of the Alarm and Monitoring System.
The power supply for the DMS2100z as well as the DPS2100 and UCS2100 must be Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) protected. There must be a separate fuse for the DMS2100z
Gamma, the DPS PLC and the remaining hardware connected to this system.
The following part of the remote control system are described in this section:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DMS2100/ Main Cabinet (Gamma PLC, VO Modules etc.)
DMS Panels for remote control of the propulsion machinery
ECR Sub Panel for Manual ECR Control of the propulsion machinery
Local Control Box for Local Control of the propulsion machinery
DPS2100 Engine Safety System
Telegraph Lever System
Electric Shaft for Bridge Wings control
Communication Telegraph System
Main Engine Speed Measurement
970.125.212
0 Lyngsø Märine
Page 11 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
2.1 DMS Panels for Remote Control
For operation of a ship's Propulsion Line, the DMS is connected with DMS operator panels
on all control locations, including instruments for RPM and Start air pressure indication and a
pushbutton for Emergency stop:
•
one in the Engine Control Room (ECR)
•
one on the Bridge
•
two panels on the Bridge starboard and Port Wings (optional)
•
a fifth panel can be mounted on an Aft Bridge (optional)
The DMS Panel is mounted together with a Setpoint Lever on all Control Locations with
DMS Control, i.e. normally Bridge and ECR, and optionally on the Bridge Wings.
30
2
^
6 0 ^
MAX
FULL
go-^
%.12O
'
120^
rpm
MAIN ENGINE BPM
P
HALF
SLOW
DEAD
SLOW
STOP
DEAD
SLOW
SLOW
HALF
FULL
MAX
O
stow
DOWH
o'w
SLOWD.
CAHCn.
o .y,;
sterna.
RESET
O
SHUT
DOWN
swnn
CAMCO.
O
*«
O
Figure 2.1 : DMS Panel, Telegraph and Instruments for Bridge and ECR Control Locations.
970.125.212
>LyngsøMarine
Page 12 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
2.1.1 DMS Panel Functions
The following main functions are available on each control location for the Main Engine/Propulsion Line:
Analog instruments for indication of ME RPM
Analog instruments for indication of ME Start Air pressure.
Dimmer potentiometer for illumination of the analog instruments
(Bridge only)
Emergency stop pushbutton with cover.
DMS2100/ Operation Panel with the following functions:
II ME iRun3tat> 10O 0
II LIMITER <Indi
TIÆ BC ±120 0 ECU
si
S2
RPM,
Et A i r
00
±12 0
O EGS
20 0
BAR
||
H
S3
RPM If
S4
Four lines display with 40 characters on each line
Softkeys [ SI ] - [ S4 ] for operation of DMS functions
Six selection keys: [ ESC ], [ ENT ]
and four [ Arrow ] keys
t>
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 13 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
[ Select ] of DMS control functions of
[ Status ], [ Control ] and [ Settings ]
Q O SPACE
STATUS
O
-
CONTROL
Control location selection and indication for:
[ Bridge Ctrl. ] key for indication and Request / Acknowledge of Automatic Bridge.
References: Chapter 3.1.1
[ E.C.R. Control ] key for indication and Request / Acknowledge of ECR Control
Station (Automatic Remote or Manual Remote Control).
References: Chapter 3.1.3
J
1 ABC
LOCAL
CTRL.
[ Local Ctrl. ] key for indication and Acknowledge of Local (Emergency) Control
Station.
References: Chapter 3.1.9
SUB-Telegraph selection and indication for:
SEA
MODE
[ Sea Mode ] operation and indication key:
Activation of this key orders Sea Mode and alarm for this is released.
Mode conditions: Control air on, Safety air on, Main start valve not blocked,
Starting air distributor not blocked and Turning gear not engaged.
When unacknowledged or conditions not fulfilled, the green LED is flashing.
When Sea Mode is present, the green LED is ON.
References: Chapter 3.2.3
[ Stand By ] operation and indication key:
Activation of this key orders Stand By at the Main Engine and alarm for this
is
released.
Mode conditions: Control air pressure on, Safety air pressure on, Main start valve not
blocked, Starting air distributor not blocked and Turning gear not engaged.
When unacknowledged or conditions not fulfilled, the green LED is flashing.
When Stand By is present, the green LED is ON.
References: Chapter 3.2.2
~J
7STU
F.WE
970.125.212
[ F.W.E. ] operation and indication key:
Activation of this key orders Finished With Engine and alarm for this is re-
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 14 of 98
2002.07.12
leased.
•
Mode conditions: Control air pressure off, Safety air pressure off
and Main start valve blocked.
When unacknowledged or conditions not fulfilled, the green LED is flashing.
When Finished With Engine is present, the green LED is ON.
References: Chapter 3.2.1
970.125.212
fi
Lyngsø Marine
Page 15 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
[ Slow Down ] operation and indication key:
Activation of the key invokes the Slowdown status list at the LCD display.
When Slowdown is active, the red LED is ON.
References: Chapter 3.5.
f ---
J
—-S
2DEF
SLWO.
CANCEL
[ Slowd. Cancel ] operation and indication key:
Slowdown may be cancelled, when in Automatic Bridge or Automatic ECR control.
When in Manual ECR Control operation takes place from the DMS as well.
When Slowdown prewarning is present, the red LED is flashing.
When the Slowdown situation is cancelled, the red LED is ON.
References: Chapter 3.5.
[ Slowd. Reset ] operation and indication key:
Slowdown may be reset, when in Automatic Bridge or Automatic ECR control and
the Slowdown condition is neither present nor cancelled.
When in Manual ECR Control operation takes place from the DMS as well.
When Slowdown may be reset due to Sl.d. condition back to normal or cancelled the
red LED is flashing.
References: Chapter 3.5.
[ Shut Down ] operation and indication key:
Activation of the key invokes the Shutdown status list at the LCD display.
When Shutdown is active, the red LED is ON.
References: Chapter 3.4 and DPS2100 User Manual.
)
3GHI
SHUTO.
CANCEL
[ Shutd. Cancel ] operation and indication key:
Shutdown may be cancelled, when in Automatic Bridge or Automatic ECR control.
When in Manual ECR Control operation takes place from the DPS2100 Control
Panel in ECR.
When Shutdown prewarning is present, the red LED is flashing.
When the Shutdown situation is cancelled, the red LED is ON.
References: Chapter 3.4 and DPS2100 User Manual.
The [ RESET ] and [ CANCEL ] keys for Shutdown and Slowdown keys are only
working on the DMS Panels which are in control, i.e. on anyone of the Bridge Panels in
Bridge Control and on the ECR Panel in Automatic ECR Control, however the Slowdown Reset can be configured to always have reset from the E.C.R. Panel.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100i
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
J
4JKL
START
BLOCK
J
6PQR
UMTS
CANCEL
Page 16 of 98
2002.07.12
[ Start Block ] operation and indication key:
Activation of the key invokes the Startblocking status list at the LCD display.
When Startblocking is present, the red LED is ON.
[ Limits Cancel ] operation and indication key:
Activation of this key Cancels the RPM Max Limit of the DMS2100z as well as
Index Limiters / OPS Limiters and RPM Loadprogram of the EGS2000.
Optionally activation of this key Cancels Startblockings.
Optionally activation of this key Cancels Slowdown.
When Cancellation is present, the red LED is ON.
The [ Limits Cancel ] key is only working on the DMS Panels which are in control,
i.e. on anyone of the Bridge Panels in Bridge Control and on the ECR Panel in
Automatic ECR Control.
UMS2100 keys for alarm functions in the DMS Gamma:
STOP
HORN
ALARM
ACKN.
[ Stop Horn ] operation key:
Activation of this key stops the buzzer in the Operating Panel.
[ Alarm Acknowledge ] operation key:
Activation of this key acknowledges the alarms present at the LCD display of the
Operating Panel.
The [ Stop Horn ] and alarm [ Alarm Ackn. ] keys can be configured to work on
several different conditions:
1.
Both keys are always working in the ECR, e.g. when the Chief Engineer always
wants to be able to acknowledge alarms. Buzzer and [ Stop Horn ] are working
on anyone of the Bridge Panels for all alarms announced on the bridge (configurable), but [ Alarm Ackn. ] will not be possible on the Bridge.
2.
Both keys are working on the present DMS Control Location, i.e. working on
anyone of the Bridge Panels in Bridge Control and on the ECR Panel in ECR
Control.
In connection with an integrated UMS alarm system, where the Watch Station can be
changed to the Bridge, the function of both keys are following the UMS Watch Station.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 17 of 98
2002.07.12
[ Alarm List ] operation and indication key:
References: Chapter 5.3.
[ Additional List ] operation and indication key:
References: Chapter 5.4.
POO.
LIST
[ Display Channel ] operation and indication key:
References: Chapter 5.5.
P
DISPLAY
owua.
[ Adjust Channel ] operation and indication key:
References: Chapter 5.6.
[ Maintenance ] operation and indication key:
References: Chapter 5.7.
[ Dimmer ] operation and indication key:
References: Chapter 5.8.
DIMVER
ALARM
O
ALARM
LIST
ALARM
[ Alarm ] indication lamp for DMS2100* Alarm detected.
Any DMS2100? alarm in chapter 6 activates this indica-
FAULT
tion.
[ Fault ] indication lamp for DMS2100i Panel in Faulty
condition,
e.g. missing communication to the Gamma Micro CPU or
missing EPROM inside the panel.
Please refer to chapter 5 and the UMS2100 System Description for further information about the alarm system functions.
970.125.212
Lyngsø Marine
Page 18 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
2.2 The ECR Sub Panel
The ECR Sub Panel is installed in the ECR Console next to the Operating Panel. This panel is
installed, if the optional Manual ECR Control is provided. It consists of several operating and
indication facilities in order to handle the engine in manual ECR control - see Fig. 2.2 below:
OMS 2100
11
12
GR
GR
START AIR
BSTRB
N SERVICE
EG
RD
17
RD
START AIR
BSTRB
BLOCKED
EMERGENCY
CON) R U
Lyngsø Marine
INDICATION PANEL
13
GR
U
GR
L5
GR
TURNING
MAIN START 1
GEAR
AR VAlVt
DISENGAGED
M SERVO
18
RD
MAIN START
AR VAIVE
BLOCKED
19
RD
TURNING
GEAR
ENGAGED
110
121
123
6R
AUX
BIOWER 1
RUNNING
AUX
DlOWtR 2
RUNNING
RD
BIK
BIK
FUEL
CAMS
ASTERN
BIK
GR
FUEL
CAMS
AHEAD
BIND
PlUG
BIK
BIND
PlUG
BIND
PlUG
PtUG
SW1
L11
WH
112
EOt
CONTROL
WH
L13 WH
ElIND
PlUG
BRIDGE
CONTROL
LP17 WH
EMERGENCY
STOP
MANUAL
SLOW
T'XJNG
BtK
BIK
BLIND
PlUG
BIK
HMD
PLUG
115 YE
AUX
BLOWERS
WARNING
IP20 WH
POWER ON
i
LAMP TEST
Figure 2.2: Front view of the ECR Sub Panel according to MAN B&W standard.
The following facilities - with designations according to fig. 2.2 - are available:
Explanations: Lx = Lamp no. x and LPx = Lamp & Pushbutton no. x
•
LI
GOVERNOR ENGAGED, i.e. when the actuator connected to the fuel rack,
then the green lamp is ON.
•
L2
START AIR DISTRIB IN SERVICE, i.e. when the distributor is in service,
then the green lamp is ON.
•
L3
MAIN START AIR VALVE IN SERVICE, i.e. when in service,
then the green lamp is ON.
•
L4
TURNING GEAR DISENGAGED, i.e. when the turning gear is disengaged,
then the green lamp is ON.
•
L5
FUEL CAMS AHEAD, i.e. when the fuel cams are in ahead position,
then the green lamp is ON.
•
L6
EMERGENCY CONTROL, i.e. when Emergency Control (Local) from the engine room is present, then the red lamp is ON.
•
L7
START AIR DISTRIB BLOCKED, i.e. when distributor blocked,
970.125.212
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 19 of 98
2002.07.12
then the red lamp is ON.
A start of the engine is not possible if this indicating light illuminates.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 20 of 98
2002.07.12
L8
MAIN START AJR VALVE BLOCKED, i.e. when the main start air valve is
blocked, then the red lamp is ON.
A start of the engine is not possible if this indicating light illuminates.
L9
TURNING GEAR ENGAGED, i.e. when the turning gear is engaged,
then the red lamp is ON.
A start of the engine is not possible if this indicating light illuminates.
L10
FUEL CAMS ASTERN, i.e. when the fuel cams are in astern position,
then the red lamp is ON.
LI 1
ECR CONTROL, i.e. when manual control from the ECR is present,
then the white lamp is ON.
LI2
BRIDGE CONTROL, i.e. when automatic control from the DMS2100/ is present,
then the white lamp is ON.
LI5
AUX BLOWERS WARNING, i.e. when the auxiliary blowers are disabled - control switch SW1 in OFF position - then the yellow lamp is ON.
LP16
EMERGENCY STOP, i.e. when Emergency Stop is ordered from this pushbutton,
then the red lamp indication is ON.
The pushbutton is protected with a plastic covering against unwanted operation.
LP17
MANUAL SLOW TURNING:
By pressing this pushbutton a Manual Slowturn is ordered, when in Manual
ECR control mode of operation. In all other modes of operation the pushbutton
is disabled. The lamp has fixed white light as long as the pushbutton is activated.
LP20
POWER ON & LAMP TEST, i.e. the white lamp is ON, when 24Volt power supply is available.
This pushbutton has a double function:
Signalling that the supply voltage is available.
Pressing this pushbutton a Lamp Test is carried out.
L21
AUX BLOWER 1 RUNNING, i.e. when auxiliary blower number 1 is running,
then the green lamp is ON.
L23
AUX BLOWER 2 RUNNING, i.e. when auxiliary blower number 2 is running,
then the green lamp is ON.
Pos. 13,14, 18,19, 22 and 24-26 are SPARE.
SW1
970.125.212
Switch for control of auxiliary blowers, i.e. OFF/AUTO/RUN positions:
Control of the aux. blowers is external to DMS2100/.
OFF Aux. blower stop command result in START BLOCKING and the
warning LI 5 going ON.
AUTO - Aux. blowers are automatically swithed ON/OFF
based on measurement of scavenging air pressure.
RUN Aux. Blowers are manually ordered to be permanently running.
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 2 l o f 98
2002.07.12
2.3 The Local Control Box
The Local Control Box is installed at the Main Engine next to the Local Manoeuvring Stand.
This box consists of several operating and indication facilities in order to handle the engine in
Local Control Mode of operation, i.e. [ LOCAL CTRL. ] - see Fig. 2.3 below:
O 6E S=EC"£D
SHUT DOWN
1
(
SHJ T DOWN
'red!
TURMNG GEAR
lys 'o»!
>VnCN3 7/AY
If cdi
ECa C
!ye 'o-,'.
AUXBLO.VE3
RLMJ'KG
GE CON-POL
Figure 2.3: Front view of the Local Control Box
The following indications are installed in the first column:
•
Indication light, SHUT DOWN PREWARNING
This red light indicates, that a Shutdown Prewaming signal is present
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
•
Page 22 of 98
2002.07.12
'
Indication light, SHUTDOWN
This red light indicates that a Shutdown condition is present.
•
Indication light TURNING GEAR ENGAGED
It illuminates in red colour, if the turning gear is engaged.
Indication light WRONG WAY.
It illuminates in red colour, if the ordered direction is opposite to the actual RPM direction of the main engine.
Indication light AUX BLOWER RUNNING
It illuminates in green colour, if the auxiliary blowers are running.
The following indications are installed in the second column:
•
AHEAD, i.e. when the fuel cams are in ahead position, then the yellow lamp is ON.
•
ASTERN, i.e. when the fuel cams are in astern position, then the yellow lamp is ON.
•
EMERGENCY CONTROL, i.e. when Emergency Control (Local) from the engine
room is present, then the yellow lamp is ON.
•
ECR CONTROL, i.e. when manual control from the ECR is present,
then the yellow lamp is ON.
•
BRIDGE CONTROL, i.e. when automatic control from the DMS21 00* is present,
then the yellow lamp is ON.
The following pushbuttons/indications are present at the bottom of the Local Control Box:
Illuminated pushbutton, CANCEL SHUTDOWN.
The pushbutton is protected with a plastic covering against unwanted operation. By
pressing this pushbutton a CANCEL SHUTDOWN is released, and indicated in red
light.
•
Pushbutton LAMP TEST. When pressing this pushbutton a Lamp Test is carried out.
•
Illuminated pushbutton, EMERGENCY STOP.
The pushbutton is protected with a plastic covering against unwanted operation. By
pressing this pushbutton an EMERGENCY STOP is released and indicated in red light.
Further indications:
•
BUZZER - placed at the bottom of the Local Control Box — is activated
when WRONG WAY alarm is present.
•
Tacho Instrument for the Main Engine RPM is placed at the top of the box. The scale is
installation dependent.
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 23 of 98
2002.07.12
2.4 Safety System for the Main Engine
The DMS2100/ is normally delivered together with an independent DPS2100 (Diesel Protection System) Safety System for Main Engine Emergency Stop, Overspeed and Shutdown protection, which is interfaced to the DMS with hardware connections.
The system is based on a DZM 402 PLC with built-in functions for overspeed protection and
speed indication to instruments, and inputs for two speed pickups. The system is then extended with one, two or three IOM 402 Input/Output Modules, with 16 DI (Digital Input)
channels and 12 DO (Digital Output) channels each for Shutdown inputs and Shutdown solenoid valve outputs.
The Digital Input channels are all with cable supervision, i.e. the Shutdown sensor must be a
normally Open Contact (OC) contact, connected with a 8k2 Ohm resistor across the contact,
and a Closed Contact (CC) will then activate the Shutdown input.
The Digital Output channels are a solid state relay output, with jumper selection of cable supervision.
In the ECR, the DPS2100 Safety System has its own DPS Panel, where it is possible to see the
relevant information for each Shutdown input channel, actual Main Engine RPM etc. on the
display, and it is also possible to make adjustments and cut-outs on the Shutdown input channels.
Three keys with LED indication on the DPS Panel are used for Shutdown indication, Shutdown Cancel function and Shutdown Reset function. At the Bridge, the corresponding functions are shown on three keys on the DMS Panel.
The following functions are included in the DPS2100 Safety System:
•
Shutdown stop output for the Main Engine (1 or 2 supervised valve outputs)
•
Cancel VIT output active on stop and astern (1 supervised valve outputs)
•
Overspeed stop of the Main Engine (2 pickup inputs)
«
Shutdown inputs (20 supervised inputs )
•
Emergency stop of the Main Engine (5 supervised inputs)
•
Alarm outputs to the alarm system (8 outputs)
•
Tacho output for ME RPM to instruments (9 +/-10V instruments)
•
Cancel and Reset inputs from DMS System, ECR and Local (5 inputs)
•
Local/Remote and DMS Control feedback (2 inputs)
For further information about the DPS2100 Safety System, please refer to the DPS2100 System Description and User Manual.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100i
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 24 of 98
2002.07.12
2.5 Main Engine Speed Measurement
The DMS2100* is using a Tacho Adapter Module (TAM401) to interface the Tacho Pickups.
The pickups are mounted close to the turning wheel on the main engine.
The TAM401 is connected to one of the CPU's on the Serial Interface Board used for measurement of the Main Engine speed.
2.6 Telegraph Transmitter and RPM Setpoint Control
The Bridge is equipped with a Telegraph Transmitter with built-in setpoint potentiometer on
the Bridge Centre Console, as the Bridge main operation station. As an option the Telegraph
Transmitter at the Bridge Centre can be interconnected by means of an Electric Shaft System
to Bridge Wing Control at:
•
Starboard Wing Panel
•
Port Wing Panel
As standard the ECR is also equipped with a similar Telegraph Receiver. Optional the system
can be delivered without equipment in the engine control room.
Bridge Centre and ECR Telegraph Levers are equipped with potentiometers with hardware
connection to the DMS System.
The Bridge - and ECR Telegraph Levers are also used as engine telegraph system, when running in manual ECR control.
2.6.1 Electrical Shaft System
Ships with Bridge Wing Control, can as an option be equipped with an electrical shaft system
interconnecting the Bridge Centre Telegraph with the Bridge Wing Control Telegraphs.
The electrical shaft system is an integrated part of the complete remote control system, but it
is based on components completely independent of the DMS Gamma and all other items of
the overall system.
The Electric Shaft System is a so-called synchronising system, in which non-activated control
levers are following the active control lever, chosen as random, i.e. when the Bridge Centre is
master, then the two Bridge Wing levers automatically follows the master lever in the Bridge
Centre.
The system has been designed in such a way, that by means of a pushbutton switch, a chosen
control unit is activated as master.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 25 of 98
2002.07.12
2.6.1.1 Bridge Centre and Wings Control Transfer
Each Telegraph Transmitter on the Bridge's Electrical Shaft System is equipped with three
lamps and one pushbutton for control transfer:
•
Pushbutton selection of which position is the master control unit
•
Lamp indication with dimmer for which one of the three control positions are the master
control unit
To change the control position between the three Control Units on the Bridge, press the
[ Take Over / ON Service ] pushbutton on the new master control position, and it will change
immediately, indicated with steady light in the [ Take Over / ON Service ]
lamp/pushbutton.
As the levers are already synchronised by the electrical shaft system, there are no need for further alignments before pressing the [ Take Over / ON Service ] pushbutton.
2.6.2 Emergency Telegraph System
For backup communication of telegraph orders from the Bridge to ECR during ECR Control,
and/or to the engine side in the Engine Room during local control, the system can optionally
be extended with a separate Emergency Telegraph System, which is completely independent
of the DMS2100z Bridge Control System and the normal communication Telegraph Levers.
By means of a rotating switch or a pushbutton for each telegraph order, and lamps for each
telegraph order, the Communication Telegraph indicates the requested order.
On the Bridge, the switch is turned to the new order/the pushbutton for the new order is
pressed. The lamp for the new order will start flashing, and the buzzer on the Bridge and in
the ECR and/or a telegraph bell local on the engine side will start sounding.
To accept the new order, the switch on the receiver (ECR or local) must be turned to the position with the flashing lamp/the flashing lamp must be pressed, which will go into steady light
and the buzzer will stop.
By means of a pushbutton on each of the receivers; it is possible to select between the ECR
and the Local Communication Telegraph as the active receiver, i.e. the location from where it
is possible to acknowledge the telegraph order from the Bridge.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
• WDl Rtnolt
* Volw Sox
• Svilit«
* = Yard Supply
Ver
File
921X244041
• * : Option
Drw
Date
Chk. Dote Ver
HAK 000919 JRK 000919
File
3
Original
DMS2100I Bridge Maneuvring System for MBD MC Engines
Configuration with DPS2100 Safety System,
EGS2000 Electronic Governor
and Bridge Wings with Electical Shaft Telegraph
i
I
2
I
3
I
4
Orw
Date
Chk
Date
Date
Lyngsø Marine
921.244.04 1
I
5
I
Sheet 1
1
foto
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 26 of 98
2002.07.12
3. DMS2100/ Functional Description
3.1 Control Change-over
The Main Engine can he operated directly from the Bridge Panel, [ BRIDGE CTRL. ] and
Telegraph Levers with optional Bridge Wing Control operating in parallel to the Bridge Centre or from the ECR Panel, [ E.C.R. CTRL. ] with Telegraph Receiver and Manual control
lever. Please refer to section 2.6.1.1 for a description of the change over between Bridge Centre and the Bridge Wings.
When [ BRIDGE CTRL. ] is selected, the Main Engine's speed and direction is controlled by
the position of the Bridge Telegraph Lever. The Gamma PLC located in the DMS2100/ main
cabinet convert the Bridge Telegraph Lever setpoint into a speed setting signal which is sent
to the governor.
The control location can be transferred between ECR and Bridge Control, or between Bridge
and ECR Control on request from either the Bridge Panel(s), or on request from the ECR
panel without a previous request from the Bridge.
The control location making the request does not have to be the present control location.
The control location (Bridge or ECR Control) requesting the new control location (ECR or
Bridge Control), must press the DMS Panel key:
•
[ Bridge Ctrl. ] If change from ECR - to Bridge Control is requested
•
[ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] If change from Bridge - to ECR Control is requested
As soon as the request for the control transfer is initiated from the Bridge or ECR, the buzzer
in the Bridge Panels and the ECR Panel will sound, and the LED in the key for the new control location will start flashing, both on the Bridge Panel and in the corresponding LED on the
ECR Panel. The buzzer sound for control transfer alert is making two beeps sounds followed
by a 5 sec pause.
The LED for the present control location will remain in steady light, until all conditions for
the new control location are fulfilled, then it will be switched off.
When the control transfer is acknowledged by pressing the flashing key on the acknowledge
location DMS Panel:
•
[ Bridge Ctrl. ] If ECR - to Bridge Control Transfer is acknowledged
•
[ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] If Bridge - to ECR Control Transfer is acknowledged
The Changeover handle in the E.C.R. Console (pneumatically in older system or electrical in
newer systems) is changed to the new control position.
The flashing LED's for the new control location will stop flashing and go into steady light, the
LED's for the previous control location is switched off, and the buzzers will stop.
If the Bridge and ECR setpoint levers are not aligned, a changeover display will show up on
the Bridge and ECR Panel with alignment barographs for the two setpoints, making it easier
to align the setpoints.
Note: the changeover display will only show up if the DMS2100i Basic mode overview display is active. If the Basic mode overview display is not active press the [ ESC ] key several
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 27 of 98
2002.07.12
times until the outermost display level'is reached.
The LED's for the new control location will continue flashing until the change over request is
either cancelled, or the Telegraph Levers have been aligned.
If the request for control transfer is not acknowledged on the acknowledge location, the request key at the request location can be pressed again to cancel the change over request. If the
control location has not changed (Telegraph Levers not aligned), the flashing is stopped and
the buzzer is silenced without further consequences.
Transfer of control are not taking place before Telegraph Levers are aligned, acknowledged is
received from the acknowledge location and the Changeover handle in the E.C.R. Console is
changed to the new control position.
Whether [ BRIDGE CTRL. ] or [ E.C.R. CTRL. ] is selected depends on the position of the
Changeover handle placed in the E.C.R. Console.
W
Note:It is always the position of this handle which determines whether the Main Engine is
controlled from the { Bridge Ctrl. ] or from the [ E.C.R. Ctrl. ]. Consequently the engine
staffs always have the possibility to change the control position independently of the
DMS2100/ and the navigators on the bridge.
When [ E.C.R. CTRL. ] is selected, the navigator will order the desired RPM through the
Telegraph system. The engine staff will acknowledge the order from the Bridge Telegraph and
control the Main Engine's speed and direction by acknowledging the order on the E.C.R.
Telegraph Handle and manually execute the order on the Manual Control Lever.
Whether the [ BRIDGE CTRL. ] / [ E.C.R. CTRL. ] or the [ LOCAL CTRL. ] is selected
depends on the position of the pneumatic change over Handle, placed on the Local/Emergency
manoeuvring stand.
Note: It is always the position of this handle that determines whether the Main Engine is controlled from the DMS2100z" Bridge Control System or from the Local/Emergency control
stand in the engine room.
Consequently the engine staffs always have the possibility to change from remote control position to local Emergency Control independently of the DMS2100/ System and the Bridge
personnel.
3.1.1 Control Position Change-over by Request from the Bridge
If the navigator wants to change the control position, then he must press the key [ BRIDGE
CTRL. ] (If change from E.C.R. control to Bridge control is desired) or [ E.C.R. CTRL. ] (If
change from Bridge control to E.C.R. control is desired).
The LED in the new control position key will start flashing, both on the Bridge and in the corresponding LED in the E.C.R. Panel. The Changeover buzzer will sound (2 short beeps pause - 2 short beeps etc.).
When the E.C.R. personnel acknowledges the change-over by pressing the flashing key on the
E.C.R. Panel and moves the change-over handle to the new control position, the flashing LED
will change to fixed light and the buzzer will stop.
If the Telegraph Levers are not aligned, [ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] LED's are flashing until Telegraph
970.125.212
P Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 28 of 98
2002.07.12
Levers are aligned or the request is cancelled.
If the request is not acknowledged, the key can be pressed again to cancel the change-over request.
3.1J2 From Bridge Control to ECR Control
The indication LED's for Control Location at change over from Bridge Control to ECR Control are indicating in the following way:
•
[ Bridge Ctrl. ] LED, i.e. the old control location is on the Bridge Panel and ECR Panel
are in steady light until transfer has taken place. Activation of the key for the Bridge
LED's will not change anything.
•
[ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] LED, i.e. the new control location is on the Bridge Panel and ECR
Panel are flashing with slow flash if the Telegraph Levers are aligned, until transfer has
taken place or the request is cancelled.
3.1.3 Control Position Changeover by Request from E.C.R.
If the engine staffs want to change the control position without a previous request from the
Bridge, then he must press the key [ BRIDGE CTRL. ] (If change from E.C.R. control to
Bridge control is desired) or [ E.C.R. CTRL. ] (If change from Bridge control to E.C.R. control is desired) and moves the changeover handle to the new control position.
The LED in the new control position key will start flashing, both on the Bridge and in the corresponding LED in the Engine Control Room Panel. The Changeover buzzer will sound (2
short beeps - pause - 2 short beeps etc.)
When the navigator on the bridge acknowledges the change by pressing the flashing key on
the Bridge Panel, the flashing LED will change to fixed light and the buzzer will stop.
If the Telegraph Levers are not aligned, [ Bridge Ctrl. ] LED's are flashing until Telegraph
Levers are aligned or the request is cancelled.
If the request is not acknowledged, the key can be pressed again to cancel the change-over request.
3.1.4 From ECR Control to Bridge Control
The indication LED's for Control Location at change over from ECR Control to Bridge Control are indicating in the following way:
•
[ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] LED, i.e. the old control location is on the Bridge Panel and ECR Panel
are in steady light until transfer has taken place. Activation of the key for the ECR
LED's will not change anything.
•
i Bridge Ctrl. ] LED, i.e. the new control location is on the Bridge Panel and ECR
Panel are flashing with slow flash if the Telegraph Levers are aligned until transfer has
taken place or the request is cancelled.
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 29 of 98
2002.07.12
3.1.5 Forced Changeover from Bridge Control to ECR Control
A Forced Changeover from Bridge to ECR control is when the engineer turns the changeover
handle in the E.C.R. Console from bridge to ECR control without a previous changeover request from the bridge.
The indication LED's for forced changeover from Bridge Control to ECR Control are indicating in the following way:
•
[ Bridge Ctrl. ] LED, i.e. the old control location on the Bridge Panel and ECR Panel
are in steady light until transfer has taken place. Activation of the key for the Bridge
LED's will not change anything.
•
[ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] LED, i.e. the new control location on the Bridge Panel and ECR Panel
are flashing, and the buzzer is sounding until the bridge operator has acknowledged the
forced changeover. This is just to tell the bridge operator that the control is no longer on
the bridge, the bridge acknowledge has no actual influence on the changeover.
If Telegraph Levers are not aligned, ECR LED's are flashing until the ECR engineer making
the forced changeover has aligned the Telegraph Levers.
3.1.6 Telegraph Levers Alignment
To be able to transfer the control location between Bridge and ECR, the Telegraph Levers for
the two control locations must be aligned. For this purpose a setpoint display with barographs
and digital readings of the setpoint lever positions is automatically displayed during the control changeover, if the levers are not aligned. Please refer to section 4.2.1 for a description of
the setpoint system alignment display.
An adjustable dead-band around the exact commands for transfer without change of RPM,
makes it easier to transfer control.
3.1.7 Cable Failure on Telegraph Levers
The setpoint potentiometers on all Telegraph Levers are individually supervised for cable failure, with an alarm for each potentiometer.
In case of cable failure on one of the setpoint potentiometers involved in a control transfer, the
demands for alignment of the involved Telegraph Levers are cancelled.
It is not possible to transfer control to a Control Position, which has cable failure on the setpoint potentiometers.
3.1.8 Local Emergency Control
The LED for [ LOCAL CTRL. ] is switched on, when either the pneumatic change-over handle on the Emergency Control Stand is changed to Emergency Control or if the Governor is
disconnected from the Fuel Rack, which is then connected to the regulating hand-wheel on the
Emergency Control Console instead.
The LED indication on the [ Bridge Ctrl. ] or [ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] keys are switched off. From
ECR control this changeover is done without any buzzer indication and confirmation from the
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 30 of 98
2002.07.12
operator, but when changed from [ Bridge Ctrl. ] to [ Local Ctrl. ], the LED in the bridge
panel [ Local Ctrl. ] key will start flashing and the buzzer will sound until acknowledged on
the [ Local Ctrl. ] key to indicate for the navigator that [ Bridge Ctrl. ] control is no longer
present.
This situation leaves the DMS2100/ system unable to manoeuvre the Main Engine.
3.1.9 Local/Remote Control Transfer
To switch back to remote control, the
•
Local Control on, feedback must be deactivated
•
Governor engaged, i.e. remote control feedback must be activated
This will activate the buzzer in the ECR Panel and the [ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] key will start to flash
on all DMS Panels.
To accept remote control, press the [ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] control key at the ECR Panel. Then the
buzzer will stop, the [ E.C.R. Ctrl. ] key will switch to steady light, the [ Local Ctrl. ] key
will switch off, and the optional output for the Remote Control On lamp indication is
switched on, and it will be possible to operate the main engine from ECR or Bridge control
again.
3.1.10 Local/Remote Control Transfer to Bridge
Control transfer from local to remote is normally acknowledged from the ECR Panel, but in
the following situations it will be possible to change directly from Local to Bridge control:
1. If the DMS lose contact to the ECR panel, e.g. due to a power failure or cable failure to
the panel. The DMS is always supervising the panels, and in case of a lost connection to
the ECR panel, it generates an alarm used to enable the control transfer directly to the
bridge.
2. In configurations without an ECR Panel, it is possible by means of the customising tool to
specify that the local/remote control transfer is always going directly to the bridge.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 31 of 98
2002.07.12
3.2 Subtelegraph
The subtelegraph is used to give an order to the engine staff. The subtelegraph is a one-way
communication system, i.e. the Bridge makes an order and the engine staff acknowledges it by
pressing the panel key associated with the order. The following orders can be signalled:
[ F.W.E. J:
Finished with engine, The Main Engine is stopped, and cannot be started.
[ Standby ] :
Main Engine is ready or running, but engine staff is needed on standby duty.
[ Sea Mode ]:
The Main Engine is running normally, and engine staff is no longer required
for Main Engine operations.
There will always be one of these orders present in the System.
When the navigator wants to change to a new order he must press the desired panel key on the
Bridge Panel. The LED in the panel key will start flashing, both on the Bridge and the corresponding LED in the Engine Control Room Panel. The change-over buzzer (2 short beeps pause - 2 short beeps etc.) will also sound. The LED indicating the old order will remain as a
fixed light.
When the engine room staff has pressed the flashing panel key the change-over buzzer will
stop, but the LED will continue flashing until all the conditions for the order has been fulfilled. When the condition for the order has been fulfilled, the LED will switch to a fixed
light, and the LED indicating the old order will be switched off.
If the order is not acknowledged, the flashing LED in the key can be pressed again to cancel
the change of order.
The following changes are permitted (please refer to figure 3.2).
Note: Direct change from FWE to Sea Condition is disabled.
Figure 3.2: Sub-telegraph change of status
3.2.1 Conditions for Finished With Engine
The following conditions are necessary for FWE:
• Control air pressure off
• Safety air pressure off
• Main start valve blocked.
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 32 of 98
2002.07.12
3.2.2 Conditions for Standby
This command orders a manned ECR for the preparation of the engine for sea going or, if the
engine is ready to start or running, where a manned ECR is required.
The following conditions are necessary for Standby: !
• Control air pressure on
• Safety air pressure on
• Main start valve not blocked
• Starting air distributor not blocked
• Turning gear not engaged.
3.2.3 Conditions for Sea Mode
This mode indicates, that there is no need for a manned engine room.
The following conditions are necessary for Sea-condition: *
• Control air on
• Safety air on
• Main start valve not blocked
• Starting air distributor not blocked
• Turning gear not engaged.
1
The conditions for the subtelegraph can be customised from the Customising Tool, but the conditions mentioned in the previous description is the normal standard conditions for a MANB&W main engine.
970.125.212
0 Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 33 of 98
2002.07.12
3.3 Main Engine Start/Stop
3.3.1 Automatic Bridge Control
When I BRIDGE CTRL. ] is selected and the system is not in [ F-W.E. ] mode; starting,
stopping and control of the Main Engine speed is controlled by the position of the Bridge
Telegraph Handle.
Moving the Telegraph Handle from Stop to Ahead or Astern will cause the starting sequence
to be activated, i.e. starting air will be supplied until the Main Engine RPM has reached starting level. At this point Start Air is removed and fuel is supplied for approx. 8 seconds at a preset speedsetting level. If the RPM is increased in this period the start is considered successful
and the RPM is set to the Telegraph setpoint value (except when limits are set by a Slowdown, load-program, or other limiting programs.)
If the Main Engine start attempt failed, a new repeated start will automatically be executed after 8 sec delay. After three failed start attempts a start-blocking occur, and the navigator has to
move the Telegraph Handle to stop before a new start can be performed.
If the Main Engine is ordered to move in the opposite direction whilst moving, starting air will
not be supplied until the Main Engine speed has decreased below reversing level. This may
take several minutes, depending on the ships speed, propeller size, loading condition and other
ship parameters.
The speed may be set to any speed between minimum and maximum, however the scale is
normally divided into 9 speedsetting orders: "dead-slow", "slow", "half and "full" in both directions in addition to "stop".
During commissioning, the rpm for each of these telegraph orders plus minimum and maximum in each direction are adjusted by the commissioning engineer in accordance with engine
builder data, yard and owner requirements.
One or more of the limitations, which are mentioned in section 3.6.2 might limit the speed.
970.125.212
P Lyngsø Marine
Page 34 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
In Bridge
Control
Control Lever
in Stop
No Start
blocking
No alarms ,
Control Lever
to Ahead
Pos.
Start Speed
Value
Initiated
Start & Ahead
Valve
Energized
NO
YES
A
•
YES
i
r
/Start attempïx
\successfull1/
Repeated Start
NO
YES
Start |
exceeded or
v? 3 attemp
YES
NO
Engine Accelerate
to RPM Setpoint
Figure 3.3.1: Main Engine Start sequence flow diagram
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 35 of 98
2002.07.12
3.3.2 Manual ECR Control
When [ E.CR. Ctrl. ] is selected the starting, stopping, reversing and speed-control of the
Main Engine is handled from the E.CR. Telegraph Handle placed in the Engine Control
Room control console.
When the Bridge staffs wants to change the condition of the Main Engine, they order the Main
Engine direction and speed by moving the Bridge Telegraph in the desired position. This will
initiate the Telegraph alarm.
The engineer moving the ECR Telegraph Handle to the same order as that received from the
Bridge Telegraph then accomplishes this from the Engine Control Room. This will at the
same time acknowledge the Telegraph alarm.
All the operation from the Engine Control Room is completely similar to the operation from
the Bridge, except that the operation is normally carried out on request from the Bridge Telegraph.
3.3.3 Start blockings
If the engine is not ready for start, i.e. Start Blocked, the [ Start Block ] LED on the Panel is
on and a <Startblok> indication is displayed n line two of the Start/Stop control display, i.e.
on the line above the softkeys. When the engine is ready for start, the indication change to either <Stopped> or <Slowt Req.> indicating if the next start will be with or without slowturning.
At the DMS Panel, it is possible to select a status list, displaying status for the different startblockings for the Main Engine. Please refer to section 4.3.5 for a detailed description of how
to display the Start Blockings List.
The following startblockings might be relevant for the DMS System:
•
ME local control on
•
ME Safety System Shutdown or Emergency Stop
•
Startfailure (Start air time-out or Max number of failed start attempts)
•
Slow turning failure (time-out)
•
Main start valve blocked
•
Start air distributor blocked
•
Turning gear engaged
•
Control air pressure low
•
Safety air pressure low
•
Start air pressure low
•
Auxiliary blowers not in auto (optional)
•
Engine running
Some start blockings are cancellable (selectable from customising tool) by means of the
"CANCEL ST.BLK" Softkey. Please refer to section 4.3.2 for a description of how to use
the Cancel Start blockings Softkey.
Cancel Start Blockings will normally activate an alarm in the DMS System also, to prevent
the operators from using it when it is not necessary. To remove the cancellation of start block-
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 36 of 98
2002.07.12
ings again, activate the "CANCEL OFF" softkey beside the "CANCEL ST.BLK" softkey.
3.3.4 Reversing
During a normal Ahead (or Astern) start from standstill, the DMS will activate the main engine Ahead (or Astern) reversing valve together with the start valve, when the Bridge telegraph is moved to an Ahead (or Astern) start position, even if the main engine was also running in the same direction last time it was running.
The Ahead (or Astern) valve will activate the pneumatic cylinders used to reverse the camshaft roller guides and also reverse the start air distributor.
Pneumatic interlocks on the engine will ensure that starting air is not supplied to the engine
before the start air distributor is reversed to the right position.
All camshaft roller guides will not be completely reversed before the engine start turning on
starting air, so there are no interlocks from the camshaft roller guides to the DMS, i.e. the
DMS will start the main engine independent ofthat one or more of the camshaft roller guides
may not reverse completely to the new direction.
3.3.5 Slow turning
Slow turning of the Main Engine is normally used before the engine is started after a longer
period of standstill, and is done by turning the engine for 1-2 revolutions on reduced starting
air.
A MANB&W 2-stroke engine is automatically Slow turned, when it has been stopped for
more than 30 min. by activating the Start Valve and Stop Valve as for a normal start, and at
the same time activating the Slow turn Valve. When the engine has turned minimum 1.5 revolution, the Slow Turn Valve is released, and the start sequence continue as a normal start sequence.
If the slowturning is not completed within a few sec (adjustable), the engine is stopped again
by deactivating the Start Valve and Slow turn Valve, and a "Slowturning Time-out alarm"
is released giving a startblocking, which must be reset by the operator (setting the bridge telegraph in stop position) before a new start attempt can be executed.
The Slowturning can be cancelled from the Start/Stop menu by means of the "SLOWTRN
CANCEL" Softkey. Please refer to section 4.3.2 for a description of how to use the Cancel
Slowturning Softkey, or by pressing the [ LIMITS CANCEL ] key on the panel.
3.3.6 2-stroke Start/Stop
A MANB&W 2-stroke engine is started by releasing the Governor Stop, activating the Start and Ahead direction valve (or Astern valve if reversing), while the Stop Valve is still activated. When the engine rpm passes the firing speed limit (8-12% adjustable), the Start - and
Stop Valve is deactivated, and after the stabilising time (adjustable) the Ahead direction valve
is deactivated (or Astern valve if reversing) and the engine is running.
970.125.212
fi
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 37 of 98
2002.07.12
3.3.7 Crash Stop
The preconditions for a crash stop detection is that the Telegraph Lever setpoint must have
been above 75 RPM Ahead (adjustable) in more than 60 sec (adjustable) when the operator
makes a reverse order to more than 20 RPM Astern (adjustable). The Telegraph Lever setpoint
must be below 75 RPM Ahead again for more than 15 sec (adjustable) before the preconditions for detection of a crash stop is reset again.
The crash stop condition is then maintained until one of the following conditions are activated: the Astern setpoint order is put below 10 RPM Astern (adjustable) or the actual RPM
comes within 5 RPM (adjustable) of the Astern setpoint limit of the 20 RPM or a maximum
time-out of 300 sec (adjustable).
When the operator initiates a crash stop, the DMS will activate the Governor Stop and Stop
valve to stop the engine, and if selected during the customising the Cancel Limits to the Governor is also activated.
After up to several minutes, the propeller speed will drop down below the reversing level of
20-25 RPM (adjustable), the Astern valve will be activated to reverse the Main Engine, and
after 5 sec delay the Governor Stop is released and the Start valve will be activated to brake
the Ahead turning of the engine and start it up in Astern direction.
When the engine speed rises above the firing speed of 8-12% RPM (adjustable) in Astern direction, the Start and Stop valve are released and the engine starts up on fuel.
After 8 sec stabilising time the Astern valve is deactivated, and 8 sec later again the Cancel
Limits to the Governor is deactivated.
3.3.8 Repeated Start
If the start attempt is unsuccessful, a second start attempt is initiated and <REP.START> is
indicated and a repeated start alarm is released.
When the engine rpm drops down below the firing speed (adjustable limit and hysteresis) the
Stop Valve, Governor Stop and Governor Cancel Limits is activated, a <Repeated start
alarm> is released, and after a 6-8 sec time delay (adjustable), a new start is initiated releasing the Governor Stop and activating the Start Valve again.
If the engine stops again after the maximum number of start attempts (configurable, normally
three), the start sequence is terminated with an alarm for three start attempts, and a start blocking, which must be reset by putting the Telegraph lever in stop position, before any further
start attempts can be made.
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 38 of 98
2002.07.12
3.4 Main Engine Shutdown
The DMS2100f is normally delivered together with a DPS2100 Engine Safety System, which
is mounted together with the DMS in the same cabinet. The DPS2100 safety system takes care
of the engine Shutdown in case of a Shutdown -, Overspeed - or Emergency stop alarm, by activating the emergency stop valve directly. All the Shutdown inputs are connected directly to
the DPS, and then send as group alarms to the DMS, for indication on the DMS panels.
The DPS2100 Panel is mounted in the ECR console, where all relevant information for each
Shutdown input channel, actual Main Engine RPM etc. are displayed. Furthermore adjustments and cutouts on the Shutdown input channels are possible from the panel.
For a more detailed description of the DPS2100 Safety System, please refer to the DPS2100
User Manual.
The three keys on the DMS2100z Panels are used for the following functions:
•
[ Shut down ] indicating Shutdown activated (steady light) and activates the Shutdown
status list display
•
[ Shutd. Cancel ] indicating Shutdown prewaming (flashing light) or activates and indicates if the Shutdown is cancelled (steady light)
•
[ Shutd. Reset ] activates Reset of the Shutdown memory (not MANB&W engines)
In case of a Shutdown, the operator at the Bridge and ECR can get a Shutdown prewaming
alarm, an adjustable time delay before the Safety System executes the Shutdown.
During the prewaming delay for the Shutdown, the LED in the [ Shutd. Cancel ] key on the
DMS panel will flash. After the prewaming delay time-out, the LED in the [ Shut Down ] key
on the DMS Panels will go to steady light and the Safety System will stop the Main Engine.
To silence the buzzer the [ Stop Horn ] key must be activated, and to acknowledge the
[ Alarm Ackn. ] key. If more alarms are present, press [ Alarm Ackn. ] again until all alarms
are acknowledged.
During the prewaming delay the operator has the possibility to cancel/override the Shutdown,
by pressing the [ Shutd. Cancel ] key, which is then indicated by steady red light in the key.
If the ME is already stopped, before the [ Shutd. Cancel ] key is activated; the Shutdown
must also be reset before it is possible to start the ME again.
To remove the cancel/override Shutdown function, the [ Shutd. Cancel ] key must be activated once more.
Further information about the reason for the Shutdown can be seen in the Shutdown List on
the DMS Panels, which is selected by pressing the [ Shut Down ] key. Please refer to section
4.3.5.3 for a detailed description of the Shutdown List.
When the Shutdown memory has been activated, the reason for the Shutdown must be removed and the Shutdown reset, before a new start of the Main Engine is possible again.
When the reason for the Shutdown has been removed, the Shutdown must be reset from the
present control location, which means that in Bridge Control the Bridge Telegraph must be
placed in Stop position to reset, in ECR Control the Manual Control Lever must be placed in
stop to reset, and in Local Emergency Control the Regulating Handle must be put in zero fuel
index position to reset the Shutdown.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 39 of 98
2002.07.12
The Emergency Stop function is also a part of the Safety System, with independent push buttons on the Bridge and in the ECR, each wired in parallel to the Safety System.
Activation of one of the push buttons will cause an emergency stop of the Main Engine even
if the panel is not in control.
When the Main Engine has been stopped by use of the emergency stop function, restart of the
engine is blocked until the emergency stop pushbutton has been released again, and the Shutdown memory is reset from the present control location.
3.5 Main Engine Slowdown
In case of Slowdown, the Slowdown memory in the DMS is selecting the Slowdown RPM
limitation in the Setpoint system, limiting the Main Engine RPM after a certain prewarning
time delay (adjustable), e.g. when a Shaft Generator has been disconnected.
The Main Engine Slowdown system is an integrated part of the DMS System. The Slowdown
inputs are normally connected directly to the DMS. Both binary and analog inputs are available. In both cases the Slowdown input(s) to the DMS are supervised inputs.
Alternatively the Slowdown inputs can be connected to the Alarm System, and outputs from
the Slowdown group alarms in the alarm system are then connected to Slowdown inputs in the
DMS System.
The Slowdown information are shown on three keys at the DMS Panel, both on the ECR and
on the Bridge Panels. It is also possible to see the status information about each Slowdown on
the Slowdown status display, and [ Display Channel ] information and use [ Adjnst Channel
] for adjustments and cutouts on the Slowdown input channels. The Slowdown inputs are
treated like an alarm input to the alarm system. For further information about alarm channels
and adjustments, please refer to chapter 5, for DMS2100z Panel Alarm and Maintenance
Functions.
The three keys on the DMS Panel are used for the following functions:
•
[ Slow Down ] key indicates Slowdown activated (steady light), and activates the Slowdown status list display
•
[ Slowd. Cancel ] key indicated Slowdown prewarning (flashing light) or activates and
indicates if the Slowdown is cancelled,
•
[ Slowd. Reset ] key activates Reset of the Slowdown memory.
In case of a Slowdown, the operator at the Bridge and/or ECR can get a Slowdown prewarning alarm, an adjustable time delay before the DMS System executes the Slowdown.
During the prewarning delay for the Slowdown the LED in the [ Slowd. Cancel ] key on the
DMS panel will flash. After the prewarmng delay time-out, the LED in the [ Slow Down ] key
on the DMS Panel will go to steady light, and the DMS Setpoint System will reduce the Main
Engine RPM setpoint to Slowdown level.
To silence the buzzer the [ Stop Horn ] key must be activated, and to acknowledge the alarm
presses the [ Alarm Ackn. ] key. If more alarms are present, press [ Alarm Ackn. ] again until all alarms are acknowledged.
During the prewarning delay the operator has the possibility to cancel/override the Slowdown,
970.125.212
fiLyngsø
Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 40 of 98
2002.07.12
by pressing the [ Slowd. Cancel ] key, which is then indicated by steady red light in the key.
Further information about the reason for the Slowdown can be seen in the Slowdown status
list on the DMS Panels, which is selected by pressing the [ Slow Down ] key. It will show a
status line for each individual Slowdown input to the DMS system. Please refer to section
4.3.5.4 for a detailed description of the Slowdown List.
To remove the cancel/override Slowdown function, the [ Slowd. Cancel ] key must be activated once more.
When a Slowdown has been activated, the reason for the Slowdown must be removed and reset, before the load of the Main Engine can be increased to the command level again, which
are determined by the Setpoint Lever position.
When the reason for the Slowdown has been removed, which is indicated by flash in the
[ Slowd. Reset ] key, the Slowdown memory is reset by pressing the [ Slowd. Reset ] key on
the DMS Panel in control, or by moving the setpoint lever in command down below the limit
for Slowdown and then increase again.
A Slowdown is also reset, if the engine is stopped by putting the Telegraph Lever in stop position or it can be customised according to the MANB&W specification to make an automatic
reset when the Slowdown condition disappears again.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Page 41 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
3.6 Setpoint System
The Setpoint system converts the potentiometer setpoints from the Telegraph Levers mounted
on the bridge and in the ECR, to Main Engine RPM setpoint output for the Governor. This
conversion is done in accordance with the speed request curves set-up in the DMS System.
The Setpoint System is illustrated by figure 3.6 below:
RPM Maximum Limit from Operating Panel
RPM Fineadjust UP/DOWN from Operating Panel
Telegraph Adjustment from Operating Panel
Bridge
Telegraph
demand
Constant SG RPM Setpoint *)
PTO Minimum RPM »)
RPM Maximum Limit
Max
select
Lever
RPM Demand from lever
Adjustment
Slowdown Limit
Fine
Adjustment
Min
select
RPM Demand Fineadjusted
ECR
Telegraph
demand
Constant SG RPM Min Limit *)
Variable SG RPM Min Limit *)
Constant SG RPM Max Limit *)
Max
select
Variable SG RPM Max Limit •)
Min
select
RPM Demand incl. SI d & RPM Lim
Maintain Speed Function *)
. Maintain RPM Setpoint
Max
select
Slope
Unit
Speed
Droop
Function
Critical
Speed
Unit
Main Engine RPM
. Governor Setpoint
Analog
Output
Adjustment
Governor Output Adjustment from Operating Panel
*) Only in use, rf shaftgenerator is in operation.
Figure 3.6:
970.125.212
RPM Setpoint System lay-out.
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 42 of 98
2002.07.12
3.6.1 Setpoint lever adjustments
The setpoint lever inputs are first going through an input scaling block, making the first rough
scaling from 0 - 2 kOhm to the internal scaling 0 - 100.00 %. Normally the setpoint lever is
not using the whole range on the potentiometer, requiring a re-scaling of the used part of the
input range so that this is covering 0 -100 % internal in the DMS.
To make it easier for the engineer to readjust the Setpoint Lever inputs, the DMS also includes
the possibility to make a re-scaling from the DMS panel (password protected), where it will be
possible to adjust the following setpoint inputs:
1. Telegraph Lever RPM setpoint Bridge
2. Telegraph Lever RPM setpoint ECR
Please refer to section 4.3.6.2 for a detailed description of the Setpoint Lever input adjustments.
3.6.2 Main Engine RPM Governor Setpoint
The Main Engine RPM is controlled either by an Electronic Governor or by a mechanical
speed governor with a speed setting unit. The input to the Electronic Governor or the speed
setting unit (e.g. an electrical-pneumatic I/P converter) for a mechanical governor is normally
a 4-20 mA current signal corresponding to the requested RPM range.
Speed drop, which enables parallel operation of two or more engines on the same gear, or between the Shaft Generator and one or more diesel generators, might be included in the governor. It is supported by the DMS, with interconnection to frequency control inputs from the
Power Management System.
The following strategies for the RPM speed setting are included in the Bridge Manoeuvring
System.
3.6.2.1 Constant RPM Setpoint
Constant RPM for PTO operation is possible from both Bridge and ECR Control. The RPM
setpoint for the Governor is a fixed value corresponding to e.g. 50/60 Hz for Shaft Generator
operation.
The Constant RPM setpoint corrected for load variations on the Shaft Generator in case of a
speed droop governor, is converted to a Governor setpoint signal without any limitations, except for Slowdown which might limit the RPM setpoint also (optional).
As long as a constant frequency Shaft Generator is connected to the Main Switch Boards, it
will not be possible to select another mode than Constant.
3.6.2.2 PTO Minimum RPM
During e.g. SG operation, the speed demand can be limited to the minimum RPM, required
from the connected SG or from other equipment connected to a Main Engine PTO output.
If the setpoint request from the setpoint lever is going down below the minimum RPM limit
for one of the connected PTO's, the limit from the PTO with the highest minimum RPM will
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 43 of 98
2002.07.12
be the resulting RPM setpoint. The limit for each PTO is predefined from the Customising
Tools. When the operator increases the setpoint again, the function is removed.
Minimum RPM for a PTO connected SG will be handled by locking the setpoint in constant
speed mode as long as a constant frequency SG is connected, or selecting the limited variable
combinator mode for SG, as long as a variable frequency SG with frequency converter is connected. The variable frequency SG might also use the maintain speed function, to maintain the
minimum RPM.
3.6.2.3 Panel Fine Adjustment of RPM
As an option, the operator can be able to fine-adjust the RPM setpoint from any one of the
DMS operator panels, independent of the control position.
This adjustment is done by means of two "Raise" and "Lower" softkeys, located on the control display for the Setpoint system. The adjustment is limited to, e.g. +1-5 %, which is selected in the Customising Tool.
By means of a "Reset" softkey, it is possible to reset the adjustment back to zero. Moving the
Telegraph handle will also reset the fine adjustment gradually back to zero.
3.6.2.4 PMS Fine Adjustment for Frequency Control
As an option, the RPM setpoint for a constant speed Shaft Generator can be fine-adjusted to
compensate for the propeller - and Shaft Generator load, to be able to maintain 50/60 Hz on
the Shaft Generator.
This adjustment is based on hardwired RPM Raise/Lower signals from the Power Management System, and is limited to the adjusted speed-droop range, e.g. +1-5 %, which is selected
in the Customising Tool.
3.6.2.5 Slowdown RPM Setpoint
When the Main Engine Slowdown is active, the RPM setpoint is limited to the adjustable
Slowdown limit after a certain timedelay (adjustable), or when a Shaft Generator has been
disconnected from the MSB.
3.6.2.6 Shaft Generator Waiting Station Hold
The SG waiting station hold is activated by the DMS when the rpm setpoint is lowered by the
operator, or in case of a RPM Slowdown, where the setpoint will be maintained on a predefined level until the shaft generator is disconnected.
After a predefined time-out the setpoint will be allowed to decrease down to the requested
setpoint. In case of a MANB&W 2-stroke engine, this time-out, without the SG being disconnected, will result in a Shutdown of the engine.
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 44 of 98
2002.07.12
3.6.2.7 RPM Setpoint Slope
Acceleration and deceleration slew rates are specified by a fixed setting adjustable by the Customising Tool, and specified in shaft RPM/sec. Another adjustment is selected when
I LIMITS CANCEL ] is activated, which is adjusted to give a faster response on the RPM
setpoint.
3.6.2.8 Maintain Speed Function
The Maintain speed function is activated by means of an input from a variable speed shaft
generator (e.g. connected with a frequency converter) running on a full range (50-100%) rpm,
but not able to maintain the full load below e.g. 60 % rpm. When the setpomt drops below 60
%, the shaft generator activates the maintain speed function, and then the DMS selects the
present setpoint as the minimum setpoint. When the operator increases the setpoint again, the
function is removed.
3.6.2.9 Critical Speed Protection
The Critical Speed function protects the Main Engine RPM from running inside a pre-defined
window (adjustable) for barred speed range, where the Main Engine are not allowed to run
due to torsional vibrations on the Main Engine or in the Propeller Shaft.
Two independent Barred Speed Range windows can be defined in the DMS System.
3.6.2.10 Speed-Droop Compensation of Setpoint
As an option, the RPM setpoint for a Speed-droop Governor can be fine-adjusted to compensate for the propeller - and Shaft Generator load, to be able to maintain 50/60 Hz on the Shaft
Generator.
This compensation is based on the RPM feedback signal, and is limited to the adjusted speeddroop range, e.g. 5 %, which is selected in the Customising Tool.
970.125.212
P Lyngsø Marine
Diese] Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 45 of 98
2002.07.12
3.6.2.11 Governor Output Scaling
The RPM scaling internal in the DMS is RPM* 10, and this RPM value is then rescaled in an
output scaling block to a 0/4 - 20 mA or 0/2 - 10 Volt output for the Governor. This scaling
can only be done by means of the Customising Tool, and requires a reload of the DMS program to the Gamma computer.
To make it easier for the engineer to readjust the RPM output for the Governor, the DMS also
includes the possibility to make a re-scaling from the DMS panel (password protected), where
it will be possible to adjust the RPM setpoint/mA relationship for the following five values:
1. Minimum RPM, e.g. 20 - 25 %
2. Dead Slow or Slow RPM, e.g. 25 - 40 %
3. Half Ahead RPM, e.g. 45 - 55 %
4. Full Ahead RPM, e.g. 75 - 85 %
5. Maximum RPM, e.g. 100 - 105 %
Please refer to section 4.3.6.1 for a detailed description of the Governor Output adjustments.
This governor output scaling adjustment is not relevant in case of EGS2000 Governor with serial interface to the DMS2100i.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Page 46 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4. DMS2000/ Panel Operation Description
The DMS operation from the ECR and Bridge Panels is similar, and made by means of softkeys, where the function is displayed on the 4-line display, and operated by means of four
keys [ SI ] - [ S2 ] - [ S3 ] & [ S4 ].
Up to five DMS Panels can be connected on a DMS System with:
•
one panel in ECR
•
one panel on the Bridge
•
two panels on the Bridge wings (option)
•
one panel on the aft bridge (option)
DMS 2100i
ALARM
100 %
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
FAULT
Figure 4: DMS21 OOi Operating Panel lay-out.
4.1 Control Right for DMS Control Functions
It is always possible to view the information on the different [ Status ], [ Control ] and [ Settings ] displays, independent of the present Control Location.
The Softkeys on the different DMS Control Functions are only working on the DMS Panels,
which are in control, i.e. on anyone of the Bridge Panels in Bridge Control, and on the ECR
Panel in ECR Control.
Activation of the Softkeys, for a DMS Control Function on a panel, which is not in control,
will activate the buzzer for a short time, to tell the operator that the operation, which he is trying to execute, is not allowed at the moment.
The Bridge Centre, Port - and Starboard Wing Panels are working in parallel, i.e. when in
Bridge Control, any operation can be done from any of the Bridge Panels without taking the
present control position for the Electric Shaft on the Setpoint Lever in consideration.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
i
Page 47 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.2 Basic Mode Overview Display on DMS Panel
The Basic Mode overview display shows general status information for the DMS System. Basic Mode is the display selected, when the [ ESC ] key is pressed one or more times from an
other display, until the outermost level is reached.
ME: <Runstat> 100.0 RPM, StAir 30.00 BAR
LIMITER:<Indicl>
TLG BC: ±120.0 ECR: ±120.0 EGS: 20.0 RPM
<Oldest unacknowledged alarm/Alarm stat>
Indications for Main Engine on the first line include:
Main Engine is Stopped
<Runstat>
STOPPED
Main
Engine is Stopped with slowturn request
SLOWT.REQ
Main Engine is Slowturning
SLOWT.ON
Main Engine Slowturning finished
SLOWT.OK
Main Engine Slowturn has failed
SLOWT.ERR
Main Engine is Starting
STARTING
Main Engine Start is failing
START ERR
Main Engine is Running
RUNNING
Main Engine is Stopping
STOPPING
RPM Setpoint unlimited
<Indicl>
NO LIMIT
RPM Max Limit active
MAX RPM
RPM/Fuel Index Limited by EGS2000
GOVERNOR
Loadprogram actively limiting RPM Setpoint
LOAD PROG
Slowdown actively limiting RPM Setpoint
SLOW DOWN
Critical Speed limiting RPM Setpoint
CRIT. SPD
Main Engine RPM
<MERPM> ±120.0 RPM
Main Engine Start air pressure
0-40.00 BAR
<StAir>
Setpoint indication on the third line include: Bridge RPM setpoint ±100.0 %, ECR RPM Setpoint ±100.0 % and . EGS2000 manual lever setpoint 0-100.0 %
•
Bridge Tig
±100.0
Bridge Telegraph setpoint
•
ECR Tig
±100.0
ECR Telegraph setpoint
•
Man. Sp.
0-100.0
EGS2000 manual lever setpoint
Indications on the fourth line will show the alarm status with the number of present alarms
when no unacknowledged alarms are present, the information of any alarm channels in manual suppression, or the oldest unacknowledged alarm if any of these are present.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 48 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.2.1 Setpoint System Alignment
When the operators are changing the control position between ECR and Bridge, this Barograph display for aligning the Telegraph Levers is automatically displayed.
ALIGN
BRIDGE AND
BRIDGE TELEG : - ECR TELEGRAF : - :- MANUAL ECR
ECR S E T P O I N T S
- - - XmmmmmnflTïïnmm
- - - XmmmmrntntmTnn- - - Xmrnm
±100%
± 92%
22%
As preconditions for the control position change-over, the Basic Mode overview display must
be active, if not press the [ ESC ] key until the outermost display level is reached.
4.2.2 Other DMS Panel Indications
Indications on other DMS Control Functions might use the following standard definitions:
•
<M0DE>
Local
Function Block is in local control mode
Remote
Function Block is in manual control mode
Auto
Function Block is in auto control mode
•
<Feedback> No Feedb.
Function Block has no feedback activated
Disengage
Function Block is Disengaging/Closing/Stopping
Engage
Function Block is Engaging/Opening/Starting
D.engaged
Function Block is Disengaged/Closed/Stopped
Engaged
Function Block is Engaged/Open/Running
2 feedb.
Function Block has two feedback signals
•
<Interlk>
Interlock
Function Block is Interlocked by external input
Blocked
Function Block is Blocked due to failure
•
<Status>
Off/Normal/etc, i.e. Feedback not activated
On/Active/Shutdown/Slow Down/St.Block, i.e. feedback activated
4.3 Operation from DMS Panel
4.3.1 Select of Machine Control Groups
To operate a DMS Control Functions by means of the Softkeys on the DMS Panel, the operator must first activate the [ Select ] key on the DMS Panel, after which the machine control
groups including DMS control functions are displayed.
SELECT CONTROL GROUP:
xl DMS START/ STOP SYSTEM
x2 DMS CONTROL FUNCTIONS
x4 DMS SG INTERFACE
x5 DMS STATUS LIST
x6 DMS I/O ADJUSTMENTS
970.125.212
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 49 of 98
2002.07.12
The requested Machine Group is selected by means of the [ Arrow ] and the [ Enter ] keys,
and the DMS Control Functions in that particular Machine Group are shown.
If a Machine Group includes only one DMS Control Function, such as the Main Engine
Start/Stop control, it is shown directly when the machine group is selected.
i
4.3.2 Main Engine Start/Stop Operation
Selecting the "DMS START/STOP" will go directly to the Softkeys for Main Engine
Start/stop [ CONTROL ) display, because the Start/Stop Group only contains one Machinery
Control Function.
The display will show the ID and Text for the function block on the first line, and information
regarding the DMS Control Function, which can be operated by means of the Softkeys on the
second line.
To execute one of the commands, activate the corresponding softkey. Only one function can
be operated at the time.
MEIST
ME START/STOP
<Mode
> <Runstat>
<ME RPM>
|S| CANCEL|S|CANCEL |S|SLOWTRN|S|RESET
j1j
OFF I 2 j STR.BLK j3[CANCEL |4 |
When Machine Control Group 21 for ME1 Start/Stop are selected, the Main Engine Startblockings can be "CANCEL"ed, Startblocking cancel can be removed again by the "CANCEL OFF" and an automatic "SLOWTRN CANCEL"ed can be requested by means of the
[ SI ] .. [ S4 ] softkeys plus "RESET" of valve supervision alarms.
Indications for Main Engine on the second line include:
<Mode>
Main Engine in Local Control
LOCAL
Main Engine in E.C.R. Control
ECR
Main Engine in Bridge Control
BRIDGE
Main Engine is Stopped
<Runstat>
STOPPED
Main Engine is Stopped with slowturn request
SLWT. REQ
Main Engine is Slowturning
SLWT. ON
Main Engine Slowturning finished
SLWT. OK
Main Engine Slowturn has failed
SLWT.FAIL
Main Engine is Starting
STARTING
Main Engine is Startblocked
STR.BLOCK
Main Engine Start is failing
STR.FAIL
Main Engine is Running
RUNNING
Main Engine is Stopping
STOPPING
Main Engine RPM
<MERPM> ±120.0 RPM
970.125.212
]
Lyngsø Marine
Page 50 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.3.2.1 Main Engine Start/Stop Status List
Pressing the [ STATUS ] key when a DMS Control Function is selected, will show the available status indications for that particular DMS Control Function, and if it includes more than
the four indications which can be shown on line two together with the softkeys, they can be
found here.
The display for Main Engine Start/Stop Control etc. includes the following information:
MEIST
ME START/STOP
ME CONTROL LOCATION
MAIN ENGINE STATUS
ME RPM
ME START AIR PRESS
<Mode
>
<Runstat>
±120.0 RPM
0-40.00 b a r
Indications for Main Engine <Mode> and <Runstat> see previous section.
4.3.2.2 Main Engine Start/Stop Adjustments
Pressing the [ SETTINGS ] key when the DMS Start/Stop Control Function is selected, will
show the adjustable parameters related to Start/Stop.
The settings display for Main Engine Start/Stop Control includes the following parameters:
ME START/STOP
MEIST
START LEVEL AH
START LEVEL AS
REVERSING LEVEL
10 .0 rpm
-10 .0 rpm
22 .0 rpm
To make the adjustment, select the actual parameter from the list by means of the
[ Arrow ] and [ Enter ] keys.
Then key in the appropriate password when asked for it and the display will show the old
value on line 3, and the new value can be typed in on line 4, which is also showing the minimum and maximum values for the adjustment.
The actual Main Engine RPM feedback is shown on line 2.
MEIST
ME START/STOP
ME RPM
>START LEVEL AH
New Value : 10.0
± 100 . 0 rpm
10 . 0 rpm
[ 0• 0; MAX AH]
To change the adjustment, type in the new value, and accept with the [ Enter ] key.
Start Level Ahead & Reversing Level are limited to the range from zero to Maximum Ahead.
Start Level Astem is limited to the range from Maximum Astern to zero.
970.125.212
*Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 51 of 98
2002.07.12
4.3.3 Select Main Engine Control Functions
The actual DMS Control Function in the "DMS CONTROL FUNCTIONS" group is selected by means of the [ Arrow ] and [ ENT ] keys, and the selected DMS Control display
with Softkeys or Status list will show up.
SELECT CONTROL OBJECT:
ME1SPF
RPM FINE ADJUST
ME1SPX
MAX RPM LIMIT
ME1TIF
ME TACHO SYSTEM
4.3.3.1 Main Engine Setpoint Fineadjust
Selecting the "RPM FINE ADJUST" will go to the Main Engine Setpoint fine adjustment
[ CONTROL ] display, with the possibility to fine adjust the rpm setpoint, e.g. to be able to
adjust the SG frequency to 50/60 Hz.
ME1SPF
RPM
<FadjStat>
S FINEADJ s
|1|LOWER
2
FINE ADJUST
±95.6
±96.7 rpm
FINEADJ|S RESET
RAISE |3
Indications on the second line include:
•
<FadjStat>
RAISE RPM
LOWER RPM
FAD J MAX
FAD J MIN
MAX RPM
MIN RPM
•
<±95.6rpm> ±0-120.0 rpm
•
<±96.7rpm> ±0-120.0 rpm
Fine adjust Raising rpm is activated
Fine adjust Lowering rpm is activated
Fine adjust Maximum rpm limit is reached
Fine adjust Minimum rpm limit is reached
Maximum RPM setpoint limit is reached
Minimum RPM setpoint limit is reached
Selected rpm setpoint from telegraph
Adjusted rpm setpoint including fine adjust add-on
Each keypress on the "Fineadj Raise" softkey will e.g. increase the RPM setpoint with
0.1 RPM for a slow speed 2-stroke engine (configurable from customising tool), and vice
versa for the "Fineadj Lower" softkey.
On the left side of the display is shown the setpoint from the Telegraph Levers or constant
speed setpoint, and on the right side is shown the setpoint including the added fine adjustment
value.
A third key "Reset" makes it possible for the operator to reset the fine adjustment value,
which is added to the setpoint back to zero.
The fine adjustment of the setpoint is limited to e.g. +/- 5 RPM (configurable from customising tool) for a 2-stroke slow speed engine.
This fine adjustment is working in parallel to the optional fine adjustment inputs from the
power management system, used when a constant speed shaft generator is connected to the
MSB.
970.125.212
* Lyngsø Marine
Page 52 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.3.3.2 Main Engine Setpoint Fineadjust Status
Pressing the [ STATUS ] key, when the "RPM FINE ADJUST" is selected will go to the
Main Engine Setpoint fine adjustment Status display.
ME1SPF
RPM FINE ADJUST
SELEC1][•ED SETPOINT
ADJUSTED SETPOINT
FINE ADJUST STATE
95 6 rpm
96 7 rpm
<Fadj Stat>
4.3.3.3 Max RPM Limit Adjustment
Selecting the "MAX RPM LIMIT" will go to the Main Engine Max RPM Limit adjustment
[ SETTINGS ] display, where the ship's crew is able to limit the maximum RPM for the
Main Engine during Password Level 1.
A new list showing the present adjustment will show up.
ME1SPX
MAX RPM LIMIT
Max RPM Limit
0 - 1 5 0 . 0 RPM
1 o make the adjustment, select the ECR MAX RPM Limit from the list by means of the
[ Arrow ] and [ Enter ] keys.
Then key in the appropriate password when asked for it and the display will show the old
value on line 3, and the new value can be typed in on line 4, which is also showing the minimum and maximum values for the adjustment.
The actual Main Engine RPM feedback is shown on line 2.
ME1SPX
MAX RPM LIMIT
ME RPM FEEDBACK
± 100 .0 RPM
>MAX RPM LIMIT
0-150 .0 RPM
New Value:
91. 7
[ECR HalfAH; MAX AH]
To change the adjustment, type in the new value, and accept with the [ Enter ] key. The Max
RPM Limit adjustment is limited to the range ECR Half Ahead to Maximum Ahead.
4.3.3.4 Max RPM Limit Adjustment Status
Pressing the [ STATUS ] key, when the "MAX RPM LIMIT" is selected will go to the Main
Engine Max RPM Limit adjustment status display, where the ship's actual RPM for the Main
Engine is shown.
ME1SPX
MAX RPM L I M I T
ME RPM FEEDBACK
970.125.212
± 1 0 0 . 0 RPM
Lyngsø Marine
I
Page 53 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.3.3.5 ME Tacho Selector
Selecting the "ME TACHO SYSTEM" will go to the Main Engine Tacho Selector
[ CONTROL ] display, with the possibility to manually "Select Tacho 1" from the DMS Tacho System or "Select Tacho 2" from the EGS2000 Tacho system. Default should during
normal operation be "Autoselect Tacho" where it for safety reasons will automatically select
the taeho with the highest RPM.
ME1TIF
ME TACHO SYSTEM
<TacMode> <TachSel> <TacFail>
+120.0
|S|SELECT |S|SELECT |S|AUTOSEL|S|RESET
I 11TACHO 11 2 ITACHO 2|3|TACHO
Indications on the second line include:
•
<TacMode> AUTO
SELECT 1
SELECT 2
•
<TachSel>
TACHO 1
TACHO 2
•
<TacFail>
Tl FAIL
T2FAIL
T1TOOHI
T2 TOO HI
Tl+2 FAIL
•
<±120.0>
±0-120.0 rpm
|4 j
Auto-select highest tacho RPM
Tacho 1 Manually selected, makes alarm for Tacho 2
Tacho 2 Manually selected, makes alarm for Tacho 1
Tacho 1 selected, (manually or auto)
Tacho 2 selected, (manually or auto)
Tacho 1 in failure
Tacho 2 in failure
Tacho 1 signal larger than 110% of overspeed rpm
Tacho 2 signal larger than 110% of overspeed rpm
Tacho 1 and 2 both in failure condition
Selected tacho RPM
4.3.3.6 ME Tacho System Status List
Pressing the [ STATUS ] key when the ME Tacho System is selected will go to the Main Engine Tacho System status list showing some more detailed information about the ME Tacho
system, than are available on the Control Display.
ME1TIF
ME TACHO SYSTEM
ME SELECTED TACHO
±120.0 rpm
ME SELEC.TACHO STATE
OK/FAIL
TACHO SELECTION MODE
<TacMode>
SELECTED TACHO
<TachSel>
TACHO 1
±120.0 rpm
TACHO 1 STATE
OK/FAIL
TACHO 2
±12 0.0 rpm
TACHO 2 STATE
OK/FAIL
TACHO FAIL STATE
<TacFail>
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 54 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.3.4 Shaft Generator Interface
Selecting the "ME SG INTERFACE" will go to the Main Engine SG Interface status list,
showing the status for the signals going between the DMS and an external power consumer,
using a primary PTO, e.g. the Shaft Generator.
ME1SGI
ME SG INTERFACE
SG PTO STATUS
NOT READY/READY
CONSTANT SG REQUEST
OFF/ON
CONSTANT SG FEEDBACK
OFF/ON
VARIABLE SG REQUEST
OFF/ON
VARIABLE SG FEEDBACK
OFF/ON
DG STANDBY START
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
MAINTAIN SPEED REQ.
It is showing if the PTO is ready for SG operation, if the SG is requested and online in constant or limited variable mode, if a standby diesel generator is requested to start or if a SG
with frequency converter is asking the DMS to maintain the present speed.
970.125.212
}
Lyngsø Marine
Page 55 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.3.5 DMS Panel Status Lists
Beside the Status indications displayed on the DMS Control Functions, the Machinery Group
X5 for Main Engine Status Lists includes some additional DMS Control Functions including
indication lists corresponding to the alarm groups for Shutdowns, Slowdowns and Startblockings in the DMS, and other for general indications of Analog and Digital Inputs in the DMS,
which are not shown in other lists.
If an alarm or event is active in one of the first two groups, the LED in the corresponding key
on the DMS Panel will light up.
Selecting the "DMS STATUS LISTS" will go to a new softkey structure with the DMS Control Functions included in this group:
SELECT CONTROL OBJECT
ME1GIF
ME GOVERNOR
ME START BLOCKINGS
ME1 SB
ME1 SHD ME SHUTDOWN
ME1 SLD ME SLOWDOWN
ME SETPOINT SYS
ME1SP
ME1STG
ME SUB TELEGRAPH
4.3.5.1 Main Engine Governor Interface
Selecting the "ME GOVERNOR" will go to the Main Engine Governor Interface List showing the status for the governor interface signals, and the values for the analog DMS settings to
the Governor, because it contains no control functions
ME1GIF
ME GOVERNOR
ME RPM FEEDBACK
GOVERNOR SETPOINT
SP.DROP COMPENSATION
GOVERNOR STOP ON
CANCEL LIMITS ON
±120. 0 rpm
0-120. 0 rpm
0-5
% rpm
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
The Governor setpoint displayed, is the adjusted setpoint without the RPM regulation compensating for the Speed Droop loss.
The physical output for the "Governor setpoint" are the sum of: Governor setpoint + Speed
Droop Compensation.
The line for Speed Droop Compensation is optional.
970.125.212
Page 56 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.3.5.2 Main Engine Startblockings List
Selecting the "ME START BLOCKINGS " will go to the Main Engine Startblocking List
showing the Startblocking conditions, because it contains no control functions. The Main Engine Startblocking list can also be selected directly, just by pressing the [ Start Block ] hardkey on the DMS Panel. The status display for Main Engine Startblockings include information
whether the Main Engine is ready for start on the first line, or startblocked on the second line
and whether the startblocking is cancelled. The following lines show what has caused a Startblocking of the Main Engine.
ME1SB
ME START BLOCKINGS
READY TO START
ON/OFF
START BLOCKED
OFF/ON
STARTBLOCK CANCELLED
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
LOCAL CONTROL
OFF/ON
SHUT DOWN
OFF/ON
START/FAIL
SLOWTURNING FAIL
OFF/ON
MAIN START VALVE BLK
OFF/ON
START AIR DISTR. BLK
OFF/ON
TURNING GEAR ENGAGED
OFF/ON
CONTROL AIR PRES LOW
OFF/ON
SAFETY AIR PRESS LOW
OFF/ON
START AIR PRESS LOW
AUX BLOWERS NOT AUTO*1
'1
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Aux. Blowers not auto startblocking is optional, not MANB&W standard.
970.125.212
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 57 of 98
2002.07.12
4.3.5.3 Main Engine Shutdown List
Selecting the "ME SHUTDOWN" will go to the Main Engine Shutdown List showing the
Shutdown conditions, because it contains no control functions. The Main Engine Shutdown
list can also be selected directly, just by pressing the [ SHUT DOWN ] hard-key on the DMS
Panel. The status display for Main Engine Shutdown includes information whether the Prewarning is active, and what has caused an Emergency Shutdown of the Main Engine:
ME1SHD ME SHUTDOWN
DPS: SHD PREWARNING
DPS: SHD ACTIVE
DPS: SHD CANCELLED
DPS: EMERGENCY STOP
DPS: OVERSPEED
DMS TACHO OVERSPEED
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
4.3.5.4 Main Engine Slowdown List
Selecting the "ME SLOWDOWN" will go to the Main Engine Slowdown List showing the
Slowdown conditions, because it contains no control functions. The Main Engine Slowdown
' list can also be selected directly, just by pressing the [ SLOW DOWN ] hard-key on the DMS
Panel. The status display for Main Engine Slowdown includes information about what has
made a Slowdown of the Main Engine.
ME1 SLD ME SLOWDOWN
SLOWDOWN PREWARNING
SLOWDOWN ACTIVE
SLOWDOWN CANCELLED
L.O. PRESS INLET
L.O. TEMP INLET
CAMSH. L.O. PRESS IN
PIST C O . PRES INLET
PIST C O . FLOW OUTLT
PIST C O . TEMP OUTLT
FC.WATER PRESS INLET
FC.WATER TEMP OUTLET
SCAVENGING AIR FIRE
THRUST BEARING TEMP
CYL.LUBRICATERS FLOW
EXHAUST GAS TEMP
CRANKCASE OILMIST
MAIN BEARING TEMP
AXIAL VIBRATION MON.
Note:
970.125.212
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
The number of Slowdowns required, depends on the Classification society.
arine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 58 of 98
2002.07.12
43.5.5 ME Setpoint System Status List
Selecting the "ME SETPOINT SYS" will go to the Main Engine Setpoint System showing
the Status List for the Main Engine Setpoint System with Setpoint system status, and the values for the analog settings in the setpoint system of the DMS.
ME1SP
ME SETPOINT SYS
RPM SETPOINT STATUS
<SetpStat>
BRG RPM SETPOINT
± 100 %
ECR RPM SETPOINT
± 100 %
SELECTED SETPOINT
0-120 RPM
ADJUSTED SETPOINT
0-120 RPM
MAX RPM LIMIT
60-120 RPM
RPM SLOWDOWN LIMIT
45 RPM
BRG EL.SH POSITION
<ElShStat>
ME MAINTAIN SPEED
OFF/ON
ME FIXED SPEED REQ.
OFF/ON
ME SG CONNECTED
OFF/ON
The Bridge El-shaft control position is optional.
The SG interface signals are optional.
Indications for the Setpoint System include:
•
<SetpStat>
NO LIMIT
RPM Setpoint unlimited
RPM LIMIT
RPM Setpoint is limited for some reason
•
<ElShStat>
CENTER
Bridge Center in control
SB WING
Bridge Starboard Wing in control
PORT WING
Bridge Port Wing in control
AFT
Bridge Aft in control
970.125.212
Lyngsø Marine
Page 59 of 98
' 2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.3.5.6 DMS2100/ Sub-Telegraph Status List
Selecting the " ME SUB TELEGRAPH " will go to the Main Engine SUB-Telegraph status
list showing information regarding the Sub-telegraph request from the bridge, actual Mode
and external sensor feedback signals on the following lines.
ME1STG
ME SUB TELEGRAPH
SUBTELEGRAPH REQUEST
<Request>
SUBTELEGR. FEEDBACK
<Modestat>
MAIN START VALVE BLK
ON/OFF
START AIR DISTR. BLK
ON/OFF
TURNING GEAR ENGAGED
ON/OFF
CONTRL AIR PRESS LOW
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
SAFETY AIR PRESS LOW
Indications for Main Engine on the second line include:
<Request>
FWE REQ
Finished With Engine request from bridge
STBY REQ
Standby request from bridge
SEA REQ
Seacondition request from bridge
<Modestat> FWE MODE
Finished With Engine Mode active
STBY MODE
Standby Mode active
SEA MODE
Seacondition Mode active
970.125.212
)
Lyngsø Marine
Page 60 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
4.3.5.7 Load Controller Status List
When the "EGS LOAD CONTROL" is selected, the Status list will display the status for
each of the limitations in the EGS2000 Limiters/Overload Protection System, including feedback for the corresponding signals used to calculate the limitations:
LOAD CONTROL
STATUS
DMS RPM REQUEST
EGS RPM SETPOINT OUT
MAX ENGINE LOAD
ACTUAL ENGINE LOAD
ACTUAL FUEL INDEX
SEL. LOAD PROGRAM
LOAD PROGRAM STATUS
LOAD PROGRAM OUTPUT
RPM LIMITER STATE
RPM LIMITER OUTPUT
ME RPM
CHARGE AIR LIM STATE
CHARGE AIR LIM OUTP
CHARGE AIR PRESSURE
SLOW DOWN STATE
SLOW DOWN LIMIT
NO LIMIT
± 100.0 RPM
± 100.0 RPM
0-110.0 %
0-110.0 %
0-100.0 %
NORMAL
MIN
60-100.0 %
LIMIT OFF/ON
0-100.0 %
0-800 RPM
LIMIT OFF/ON
0-100.0 %
0-3.00 bar
OFF/ON
40.0 %
Note: The EGS Load Control status list is optional, and requires that the DMS2100i and
EGS2000 are connected by means of a Serial Interface.
970.125.212
}
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 61 of 98
2002.07.12
4.3.6 Input/Output Adjustments
Selecting the "DMS I/O ADJUSTMENTS" key on the control group display, will go to a
new softkey structure with the Machinery Control Functions, with inputs or outputs, which
can be adjusted:
SELECT CONTROL OBJECT:
ME1GIFO GOVERNOR OUTPUT ADJ
ME1SPAB BRG RPM LEVER ADJ
ME1SPAE ECR RPM LEVER ADJ
ME 1 SPAM EMG RPM SETPT ADJ
Installation dependent optional EMG RPM SETPT ADJ.
4.3.6.1 Adjustment of Governor Output
Selecting the "GOVERNOR OUTPUT ADP'ust for adjustment from the "DMS INPUT/OUTPUT ADJUST" on the group display, it will be possible to adjust the mA output
for e.g. the following speeds listed in the display (corresponding e.g. to min, Slow, Half, Full
and Max on a 2-stoke engine) and then of course, it must be checked if the main engine speed
changes to the corresponding RPM setpoint, or if the output needs further fine-adjustments.
The adjustment is password protected at Level 2.
ME1GIFO GOVERNOR OUTPUT ADJ
RPM OUTPUT TABLE XI
20.0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE Yl
20.0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE X2
40.0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE Y2
40.0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE X3
55.0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE Y3
55.0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE X4
77.0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE Y4
77.0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE X5
100.0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE Y5
100.0 RPM
To make the adjustment, select e.g. the Manoeuvre Full Speed Output for 75% RPM (i.e.
Output table Y4) from the list by means of the [ Arrow ] and [ Enter ] keys.
Then key in the appropriate password when asked for it and the display will show the old
value on line 3, and the new value can be typed in on line 4, which is also showing the minimum and maximum values for the adjustment.
The actual RPM setpoint is shown on line 2, which for the Constant Speed adjustment requires that Constant Speed is selected, and the internal RPM adjustment for Constant speed is
correct (CT adjustment only).
The Governor Output request from the DMS, is the setpoint, which is transformed to a mA
signal for the Main Engine Governor.
Note: this adjustment is not relevant in case of EGS2000 with serial interface to DMS2100/.
970.125.212
0 Lyngsø Marine
Page 62 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
ME1GIFO GOVERNOR OUTPUT ADJ
77 .0 RPM
ACTUAL RPM SETPOINT
77 .0 RPM
RPM OUTPUT TABLE Y4
New Value :
0 .0;
3200. 0]
78.9 [
To change the adjustment, type in the new value by means of the arrow keys, and accept with
the [ Enter ] key.
4.3.6.2 Adjustment of RPM Telegraph Levers
Selecting the "BRG, ECR OR EMG RPM LEVER ADJ" for adjustment from the "DMS
INPUT/OUTPUT ADJUST" on the group display, which will contain an entry key for the
input from all the Telegraph Levers, it will be possible to offset adjust the setpoint in the three
positions: Stop-zero/100% Astern and 100% Ahead RPM, just by pressing the right key, when
the setpoint lever is in the corresponding position. The adjustment is password protected.
ME1SPAE ECR RPM LEVER ADJ
± 0-80 %
± 0-100 °
|S|ADJUST |S|ADJUST |S|ADJUST
j l j ZERO |2 j100% AS|3[100% AH
On the left side of line two, the unsealed input from the input scaling block is displayed, e.g.
for a 0 - 1000 Ohm potentiometer scaled 0 - 100%, only the mechanical range 100 - 900 Ohm
corresponding to ± 80% is used, and this is then rescaled to ± 100% for internal use in the system. All three lever adjustments are similar.
4.3.6.3 RPM Setpoint Adjustment Status List
On the setpoint adjustments status list, the unsealed setpoint input and the scaled setpoint is
displayed.
ME1SPAB BRG RPM LEVER ADJ
BRG RPM SETPT INPUT
± 80.0 %
SCALED BRG RPM SETPT
± 100.0 %
ME1SPAE ECR RPM LEVER ADJ
ECR RPM SETPT INPUT
± 80.0 %
SCALED ECR RPM SETPT
± 100.0 %
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 63 of 98
2002.07.12
5. DMS2100/ Panel Alarm and Maintenance Functions
The Operating Panel can operate in a basic overview mode or in one of the 7 main modes.
This section describes these modes in further detail, that is:
• Basic overview mode.
• Control Functions mode, please refer to chapter four, for description of Control functions
• Alarm list mode.
• Additional list mode.
• Display channel mode.
• Adjust channel mode.
• Maintenance mode.
• Dimmer Mode.
5.1 Basic Mode
The Basic Mode overview display shows the status for the DMS2100/, the actual rpm and
starting air pressure values as well as the present settings from the telegraph handles on the
bridge and in the engine control room and the Manual RPM Speedsetting in ECR.
Indications on the fourth line will show the alarm status with the number of present alarms
when no unacknowledged alarms are present, the information of any alarm channels in manual suppression, or the oldest unacknowledged alarm if any of these are present.
ME : SLOWT .REQ
0. 0 RPM, StAir 25 0 BAR
LIMITER: NO LIMIT
TLG BC: 25.0 ECR : 25.0 EGS: 30 0 RPM
S*MODULE DMS1M101 (REM4 01) ERROR ALM
11 Alarms
CH( s) SUPP.
<Oldest unacknowledged alarm >
The basic mode is meant as a "standby mode". By pressing [ESC ] a finite number of times
(normally once, in some menus twice), the basic mode is obtained.
Li the basic mode, the panel displays in the fourth line:
• The "*" indication if unacknowledged alarms are present in the DMS2100/.
• The "S" indication if the alarm is simulated in the DMS2100/.
• The number of alarms and unacknowledged normals in the DMS2100/.
• If manual suppressed channels are present in the DMS2100*" (i.e. simulated or manual cutout).
970.125.212
P Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100Z
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 64 of 98
2002.07.12
5.2 Hard - and Softkey Overview
i- Basic
Alarm List
1
[Local PLC Alarm list]
Display Channel
S1: STEP ALL
• S2: STEP ANALOG •
• S3: USER ID
• Display Channel
{all sequence)
• {analog sequence} —
• "USER ID:"
Adjust Channel
(requires password)
Additional Lists
#
]-S1:LOCALPLC•S2: ENTIRE SYSTEM'S"!: SUPPRESSED
S1: SIMULATED
• S2: MANUAL CUTOUT
• S3: AUTO CUTOUT —
-S2:FA!L
•S1: SENSOR FAIL
• S2: DEVICE FAIL L
S3: ALARMS
S1: PRIO1 ALARMS-S2:PRIO1+2 ALARMS
-S3: ALL ALARMS
Display Channel
Dimmer Adjust (off-sets)
S1: LCD Display
S2: View Angle
S3: LED Display
S4: Back Ground
Maintenance
— S1 : Display Time
S2: Version Control -
S3: Set Time
L1,S4:More
— S1: Lamp Test
S2: Select Utc/Lt
S3: Commis Mode
L2, S4: More
— S1: Change PW Lewi •
S2: Change PW Iev2-
S3: Change PW Iev3
L3, S4: More
— S1 : Change PW Lev4 •
S2: System PW lev -
S3: Lop-Ucs Control
L4, S4: More
— S i . Watch Dog tsi
S2: Store Setup
S3:
L5, S4: More
•
Figure 5.1: This overview show the entry hardkeys to the different main modes, and how the Soft
keys S1..S4 are used to select the differentfunctions when one of the main modes is active.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 65 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
à
5.3 Alarm List Mode
The Operating Panel enters the Local PLC alarm list mode for DMS2100/, when [ ALARM
LIST ] is pressed. Other lists in the system are accessed by pressing [ ADD. LIST ].
The ALARM LIST LED is illuminated, when the panel operates in the alarm list mode.
The alarm list includes all standing and unacknowledged alarms. The alarms are placed
chronologically in the alarm list.
When [ ALARM LIST ] is pressed, the DMS2100z LCD displays:
<no> Alarms Alarm LIST <alarm s y s t e m > •»•T
S*<channel name
> <stat >
S*<channel name
> <stat >
S*<channel name
> <stat >
Activating the [ < ] key brings forward mode 2:
<no> Alarms Alarm LIST <alarm system> -4T
S*<id>
<value>
< mes txt >
S*<id>
<value>
< mes txt >
S*<id>
<value>
< mes txt >
Activating the [ < ] key brings forward mode 3.
NOTE: Mode 3 displayed below is not shown in a stand alone DMS2100/ system:
<no> Alarms
S*<id>
<
S*<id>
<
S*<id>
<
Alarm LIST <alarm system> * T
text
>
< stat >
< stat >
text
>
text
>
< stat >
Line 1 of the LCD is used to display the total number of alarms and the name of the selected
list "Alarm LIST". The next line(s) is used for display of standing- and unacknowledged
alarm(s). The newest alarm is at the bottom of the display, i.e. entry of the alarm list is always
from the <END OF LIST>:
<no>
XX
<alarm system> LOCAL PLC
S
*
<channel name> Alarm text
<stat>
ALM
FALL
NORM/CA
970.125.212
Number of standing and
unacknowledged alarms
DMS2100i System PLC
Simulated channel
Unacknowledged alarm
Text describing the actual alarm
Alarm condition is present
Sensor failure
Cut-out of alarm is active
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 66 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS21007
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
li
NORM
ÜGone
<id>
<mes txt>
<text>
<value>
Alarm ID
NORMAL
SENS FAIL
ALARM
COMM. OK
Located in PLC: X
Optional
(Manual or automatic cut-out)
Alarm condition has normalised
Alarm acknowledged and normal
Device failure
The channels user identification
Explaining text with examples below:
The alarm is non-standing
Sensor failure
Alarm is present
Communication is OK
Alarm originates in PLC number X
Physical value of analog channel
If a channel, which is displayed, is acknowledged and returns to normal, it is not removed
from the display. It will first disappear when the operator steps in the list, or enters the list
again.
By means of the [ A ] / [ T ] keys, the operator can select the previous / next 3 alarm in the
alarm list. This means that [ A ] will display older alarms, and [ • ] will show newer alarms.
When the operator reaches the start/end of the list, this is indicated by:
<STARTOFLIST> and
<END OF LIST>
respectively.
If no alarms are present in the list, the No. of alarms is 0 and the line(s) used to display the
alarm(s) is blanked.
Example: When [ ALARM LIST ] is pressed, the DMS2100i LCD displays:
AT
A l a r m LIST LOCAL PLC
*GAMMA 1 : COMM. TO PCS PANEL 1 NORM
ME CONTROL POSITION FAIL
! ! Gone
*ME TACHO 2 ERROR
ALM
13 Alarms
m
"TACHO 2 ERROR" is the newest of the alarms, "GAMMA 1: COMM. TO PCS PANEL 1"
is non-standing and "CONTROL POSITION FAIL" is non-standing and acknowledged.
Further information like User Id and signal whereabouts may be obtained by activating the
[ > ] and [ < ] keys. A total of three modes are available.
1 3 Alarms
* G 1 LOP1
ME1 POS
*ME1 RPM2
Alarm LIST LOCAL PLC
1 3 Alarms Alarm
* G 1 LOP1 Located
ME1 POS
Located
*ME1 RPM2 Located
970.125.212
AT
COMM. OK
! ! Gone
ALM
AT
LIST LOCAL P L C
i n PLC : 1
NORM
i n PLC : 1
! ! Gone
i n PLC : 1
ALM
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 67 of 98
2002.07.12
5.4 Additional List Mode.
#
An DMS2100/ Operating Panel enters the additional list mode when [ ADD. LIST ] is
pressed. The add. list LED is illuminated as long as the panel operates in this mode. During
operation the following lists are supported:
• List of simulated monitoring channels.
• List of monitoring channels in manual cut-out
• List of monitoring channels in automatic cut-out
• List of monitoring channels in sensor fail.
• List of monitoring channels in device fail.
• List of monitoring channels in alarm or fail, priority 1
• List of monitoring channels in alarm or fail, priority 1 + 2
• List of monitoring channels in alarm or fail, total.
When [ ADD. LIST J is pressed, the operator must first select LOCAL or GLOBAL LIST - if
the DMS2100* is fully integrated with the UMS2100 alarm system - and thereupon the actual
list type is chosen.
Entry at the Alarm lists is at the <End of list>, i.e. the newest alarm, while Entry at other lists
are at the <Start of list>, i.e. the lowest channel number.
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Page 68 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
5.4.1 Selecting the List Type.
When [ ADD. LIST ] is pressed, the DMS2100* LCD displays:
SELECT LOCAL OR GLOBAL LIST:
s LOCAL
1 PLC
NOTE:
S ENTIRE
2 SYSTEM
This LCD display is omitted, if the DMS2100z is not fully integrated with the
UMS2100 alarm system.
Please refer to the overview in figure 5.2 for the complete soflkey hierarchy.
When the system is chosen the selection of list types are presented:
SELECT LIST TYPE
<no>
<no>
S SUPS FAIL
1 PRESSED 2
<no>
S ALARMS
3
Above each soflkey indication, the number of entries <no> are displayed for the Local PLC.
The following LCD displays are an example of how to get to the wanted list - in this case the
Manual Cut-out-list:
When the suppressed list type [ SI ] is chosen the actual sub-list is pointed out:
SELECT SUPPRESSED LIST TYPE
<no>
<no>
<no>
S|SIMUS|MANUAL |S|AUTO1jLATED
2 jCUTOUT j 3 I CUTOUT
Finally the chosen Manual Cut-out-list [ S2 ] can be viewed:
3 Manual Cut-outs
LOCAL PLC
AT
MODULE DMS1C002 (SIO) ERROR
NORM/CA
ME CONTROL POSITION FAIL
NORM/CA
ME TACHO 1 ERROR
NORM/CA
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 69 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
5.4.2 At the List Level
When alarm system and list type has been specified, the Operating Panel displays the list entries using the following layout:
<no>
< l i s t type>
S*<channel name
S*<channel name
S*<channel name
<alarm .3ystem> *Y
> <stat >
> <stat >
> <stat >
The first line contains the list count, the list type and the alarm system:
•
<no>
Number of items in chosen list
XX
•
<list type>
Simulated Channels Simulated channels list
Manual Cut-outs
Manual cut-out list
Automatic Cut-outs Automatic cut-out list
Sensor Fails
Sensor fails list
Device Fails
Device fails list
Alarms priority 1 list
Alarm Prio 1
Alarms priority 1 and 2 list
Alarms Prio 1+2
Alarms Prio 1+2+3 Total alarm list
•
<alarm system> LOCAL PLC
DMS2100i System PLC
UMS2100 Alarm System
DMS ALM SYS
•
S
Simulated channel
•
*
Unacknowledged alarm
•
<channel name> Item text
Text describing the actual item
Alarm condition is present
•
<stat>
ALM
FAIL
Sensor failure
Cutout of alarm is active
NORM/CA
(Manual or automatic cut-out)
Alarm condition has normalised
NORM
Alarm acknowledged and normal
!! Gone
Device failure
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 70 of 98
2002.07.12
5.5 Display Channel Mode
The Operating Panel enters the display channel mode, when [ DISPLAY CHANNEL ] is
pressed. As long as this mode is on, the display channel LED is illuminated. In this mode it is
possible to display and change the channel specification for all monitoring channels in the
DMS2100*.
Selection of the channel to display can be done in the following ways:
• By entering the monitoring channel ID (user ID)
• By browsing in a list of all monitoring channels.
• By browsing in a list of all analog monitoring channels
• If the display displays monitoring channels when [ DISP CHANNEL ] is pressed, the operator can select between the displayed channels (e.g. in alarm list mode, the operator can
select between the displayed alarms).
Please refer to the overview in figure 5.2 for the complete softkey hierarchy including where
to activate Display Channel.
When a channel is entered pressing [ > ] or [ < ] causes the <next>/<previous> channel to be
displayed. By next/previous is meant:
• If the channel is selected by entering user ID, the next/previous channel - sorted after user
ID - is selected.
• If the channel is selected by browsing between all channels, the next previous channel sorted after user ID - is selected.
• If the channel is selected by browsing between analog channels, the next previous analog
channel - sorted after user ID - is selected
• If the channel is selected from a list, the next/previous channel - sorted after user ID - is selected.
5.5.1 The Text Entry Screen
If [ DISPLAY CHANNEL ] is pressed while the Operating Panel does not display any alarm,
the following layout is displayed:
USER ID: <][D>
S1 STEP
l| ALL
STEP
s USER
ID
ANALOG
3
2|
s|
The user ID is initialised to the last displayed ID. First time after a restart of the DMS2100/,
ID is initialised to the lowest ID.
By pressing [ ESC ] the panel returns to basic mode. By pressing [ ENT ] the current channel
number is selected and the panel enters the "channel status screen".
By pressing the softkeys [ SI ]/[ S2 ] it is possible to browse through channels of the
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 71 of 98
2002.07.12
i
DMS2100Ï. The [ SI ] key allows stepping through all existing channels while [ S2 ] allows
stepping through all existing analog channels. Once the [ SI ]/[ S2 ] keys are pressed, the
panel enters the "stepping/status screen".
5.5.2 The Stepping/status Screen
When the [ SI ]/[ S2 ] softkeys are pressed in the "text entry screen", the panel allows selecting of channel addresses by browsing. This is illustrated below:
<ID> < c h a n n e l name
PRESS [LEFT] FOR PREV.,
>
[RIGHT] FOR NEXT
By use of the two cursor keys [ < ] and [ > ] it is possible to select the previous/next channel
on the DMS2100/. By each key-press, the panel displays the new channel ID and channel
name. The stepping procedure is meant as a fast way of selecting related channels while the
"text entry screen" provides the initial channel address.
The type of stepping (i.e. all channels, or all analog channels) is determined by which softkey
that caused the "stepping/status screen" to pop up.
By pressing [ ESC ] the panel returns to the "text entry screen", by pressing [ ENT ] the panel
enters the "channel status screen" displaying information about the presently selected monitoring channel.
5.5.3 Channel Status Screen.
The "channel status screen" is used for displaying information about a valid selected monitoring channel:
?
ME START AIR PRESSURE LOW
ME1CFG01
-5.05 bar
DEV . FAIL
UTC TIME
:
00-08-22 08 :13: 26
LI: LOW PRES LOW LIMIT
10 .00 PRIO 1
At this level of the display channel mode there are additional lines of information.
By the use of [ *• ] and [ • ] the operator can select new lines of status information.
Hence, the vertical cursor keys [ * ] and [ • ] select new lines of information while the horizontal cursor keys [ < J and [ > ] select new channels. By pressing [ ESC ] the "text entry
screen" is displayed, that is, [ ESC ] must be pressed twice to reach the basic mode.
970.125.212
>Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 72 of 98
2002.07.12
5.5.4 The Entry Selection Screen.
When the panel operates in basic mode, for instance, the LCD displays information about the
eldest unacknowledged alarm. When there is at least one unacknowledged alarm in the alarm
list, when [ DISPLAY CHANNEL ] is pressed, the panel switches directly to the "channel
status screen" showing information about the actual monitoring alarm.
If [ DISPLAY CHANNEL ] is pressed while the operating panel displays more than one
alarm, the LCD displays the "entry selection screen" prompting the operator to choose between the displayed alarm entries.
SELECT CHANNEL TO DISPLAY
S*<channel name
*<channel name
*<channel name
>
>
>
<stat >
<stat >
<stat >
The information of each line depends on whether alarm list mode 1, 2 or 3 was selected prior
to pressing [ DISPLAY CHANNEL ]. Mode 3 is not available in a stand alone DMS2100*"
system.
The dynamic values are not updated in the "entry selection screen" mode.
The cursor is placed at the first alarm. The cursor can be moved by use of [ * ] and [ • ]. The
operator can select between the displayed alarms only, that is, it is e.g. not possible to scroll an
entire alarm list after the [ DISPLAY CHANNEL ] has been selected.
If [ ENT ] is pressed, the channel which is pointed out by the cursor is selected, and, the panel
enters the "channel status screen". By pressing [ ESC ] the panel returns to basic mode.
The following modes support the "entry selection screen" (active prior to pressing [ DISPLAY CHANNEL ]):
• Basic mode.
• List mode.
• Suppressed list mode (cutouts or simulated channels).
970.125.212
P Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 73 of 98
2002.07.12
#
5.6 Adjust Channel Mode.
Adjust is a sub mode to the display channel mode. Adjustments can be carried out from anyone of the DMS2100/ Operating Panels. [ ADJUST CHANNEL ] is only active when the
panel displays the "channel status screen" of the display channel mode, i.e. when a channel parameter which can be adjusted is displayed.
If [ ADJUST CHANNEL ] is a valid keystroke, and the panel is not in a privileged access
level, the panel prompts the operator for a level 1 password. The adjust channel and display
channel LEDs start to flash when the password is entered successfully. The display channel
LED continues to flash as long as the panel is operating at the "channel status screen" and the
timeout of app. 2 minutes has not expired. After timeout or leaving intentionally the "channel
status screen" the password for [ ADJUST CHANNEL ] must be re-entered unless still in
privileged access level.
With the legal password entered, or if the system is already in an access-privileged mode, the
panel prompts the operator for a new value, when a parameter is selected by pressing [ ENT ].
When the adjustments of new values have been finished [ ESC ] is pressed and the panel returns to the "channel status screen" of display channel mode, i.e. the panel has left the adjust
mode, but the display channel LED continues to flash.
The adjust mode can be used when:
• A manual cutout is made on a channel.
• An Input channel is applied a simulated value.
• An analog channel changes its limits.
• A channel changes its delay-times, i.e. the time a signal must have passed the high/low
limit (analog) or opposite value (binary) before the DMS2100z system regard it as a change
of state.
Other fields, which are displayed in the channel status screen, are not to be adjusted; e.g. the
crew on board the ship cannot change the alarm priority.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 74 of 98
2002.07.12
Example:
e
ME START AIR PRESSURE LOW
ME1CFG01
5.05 bar
UTC TIME
:
00-08-22
LI: LOW PRES LOW LIMIT
ME START AIR PRESSURE LOW
LI: DELAY (SEC) ON:
8
CUT-OUT:
SIMULATION: OFF
ME START AIR PRESSURE LOW
TYPE
: ANALOG
ALARM GROUPS : _
ALARM SYSTEM : DMS ALM i3YS
ME START AIR PRESSURE LOW
IN DATALOG
: YES
MAIN INPUT
: SENSOR INPUT
END OF DISPLAY CHANNEL
?
DEV. FAIL
08:13:26
10.00 PRIO 1
?
OFF:
MAN:
8
OFF
p
p
01/00/01/03
Example: The analog value for a channel is displayed together with the high and the low
alarm limit.
By use of [ < ] , [ > ] , [ A ] and [ • ] the operator may scroll through the different parameters in
the channel set-up. The available parameters are listed below:
Explanation:
No:
Presentation lay-out at the LCD display:
Alarm low limit 1 for
LI : LOW PRES LOW LIMIT <value>
1
2
3
4
970.125.212
LI: DELAY (SEC) ON:
LI: DELAY (SEC) OFF:
CUT-OUT:
MAN:
<value>
<value>
<value>
SIMULATION:
<value>
Starting Air Pressure
Alarm delay time for turning ON
Alarm delay time for turning OFF
Manual cut-out can be
selected ON or OFF
Simulation of starting air press,
selected ON or OFF
]
Lyngsø Marine
Page 75 of 98
2002.07.12
Diese] Manoeuvring System, DMS2100Î
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
5.6.1 Entering of Numerical Data and Texts
Numerical data and text are entered via the alpha/numerical keys.
If the operator has to enter a numerical value, only the numerical part of the alpha/numerical
keys are active. The entry procedure is as for a normal pocket calculator.
If the operator has to change a text, both the numbers and characters can be entered. The entry
follows the standard principles used for mobile telephones.
If a key is pressed, the first stated character on the key is displayed. If the key is pressed again,
the second stated character on the key is displayed. If another key is pressed, the entry is accepted and the cursor moves one position to the right. If the operator has to enter the same
character twice in a row following each other, he must press [-»] to accept the first entry and to
proceed to the next.
Example - Text Entry:
The operator has to enter G11X.
Operator Enters
[3 GHI]
Display Shows
3
[3GHI]
G
[1 ABC]
Gl
H
Gl
[1 ABC]
Gil
[8VWXJ
Gil 8
[8VWX]
GUV
[8VWX]
G11W
[8VWX]
G11X
The [0 #] is used to enter space, special characters and national characters (e.g. _,U,Æ). I.e.
the number of characters and which characters that is hidden below the [0 #] key depends of
the national language that is selected.
The [-] and [->] is used to step backward/forward in the entered text, without clearing the already entered characters.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 76 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
5.7 Maintenance Mode.
Maintenance offers a wide range of different functions. Most of them are related to the restricted access levels one to four, where four is the highest priority level of the DMS2100*.
Only Lyngsø Marine Service Engineers have access to the items protected by access level four
as indicated in the overview list below.
When [ MAINTENANCE ] is pressed, the Operating Panel displays the first of several maintenance functions:
SELECT MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
|s DISPLAY|S VERSION S SET
|1
TIME
|2 CONTROL 3
TIME
|S
|4
MORE
The operator can now browse through the headings of the maintenance functions by using the
softkey S4. To select the displayed maintenance function, the actual softkey SI to S3 is
pressed. Pressing [ ESC ] makes the Operating Panel return to basic mode.
The Maintenance LED flashes while the system is in either commissioning mode or LM
password level four.
Dependent on the panel location and functionality, a restricted set of the following maintenance functions are available, i.e. the Bridge Panel of the DMS2100/ only includes display/set
of time, version control and lamp test:
SELECT MAINTENANCE FUNCTION:
S DISPLAY S
1 TIME
2
S
S LAMP
1 TEST
2
S CHANGE S
1 PW LEV1 2
S CHANGE s
1 PW LEV4 2
S WATCH
S
1 DOG TST 2
VERSION
CONTROL
SELECT
UTC/LT
CHANGE
PW LEV2
SYSTEM
PW LEV
STORE
SETUP
S
3
S
3
S
3
S
3
S
3
SET
TIME
COMMISS
MODE
CHANGE
PW LEV3
LOP-UCS
CONTROL
S
MORE
4
S
4
MORE
S
MORE
4
S
MORE
4
S
4
MORE
Display time and date.
View load sequential date and number.
Set time and date (priv. access level 1).
Lamp Test.
Select between UTC and Local Time (priv. access level 1).
Enter/Leave commissioning mode (priv. access level 4).
Change password - level 1 (priv. access level 2).
970.125.212
> Lyngsø Marine
Page 77 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
• Change password - level 2 (priv. access level 3).
• Change password - level 3 (priv. access level 3).
• Change password - level 4 (priv. access level 4).
• Enter/Leave system password level (priv. access level 4).
• Disable LOP control of UCS - Global disable (priv. access level 3). Optional.
• Watch dog activation (priv. access level 4).
• Store Setup (priv. access level 4).
The functions/sub-screens are described more in the following.
5.7.1 Display Time and Date
This facility is used for displaying the actual time and date. Next to these values, the actual
formats are specified; hence, the operator will know whether the date is May 10th, or Oct 5th.
DISPLAY TIME & DATE
HH:MM:SS
LOCAL TIME
: 08:40:05
UTC TIME
: 08:40:05
YY:MM:DD
00.08.18
00.08.18
By pressing [ ESC ] the Operating Panel returns to the maintenance screen.
5.7.2 View Program Version, Load Sequential Date and Number
Is used for viewing the release number and sequential date/number of the DMS2100* installed:
VIEW PROGRAM VERSION/DATABASE VERSION
VERSION/TYPE NO. :
5.01 / 970.409.101
DATABASE/SEQ
:
20000727 / 137
SHIP NAME
:
Name of the ship
By pressing [ ESC ] the Operating Panel returns to the maintain screen.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 78 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
5.7.3 Set Time and Date (priv. access level 1)
If set time and date is selected, the operator first has to enter a password and then select local
or UTC time:
ENTER PASSWORD
-
LEVEL
1:
SET TIME & DATE
Is
1
SET
UTC
s| SET
2| LT
When UTC or local time is selected, the operator has to select between:
• Set the time.
• Set the date.
• Increase/Decrease the time with xx minutes. This can be used when passing on to a new
time zone. Only relevant for local time.
When UTC Time is selected the following display appears:
SET UTC TIME & DATE
|s| SET
111 TIME
|s SET
|2 DATE
Set Time (only valid for "Set UTC" Menu):
When [ SI J/SET TIME is pressed a new UTC time can be entered:
SET UTC TIME
ENTER NEW TIME :
CURRENT TIME
:
11:1 5:35
11:1 6:55
(HH :MM:SS)
The entry of a new UTC time follows the guidelines of entering numbers, see section 5.6.1.
Once the selection is finished, the operator enters [ ENT ] and the Operating Panel updates the
date, and returns to the "Set UTC time & date"-screen. By pressing [ ESC ] the Operating
Panel skips the date correction and returns to the "Set UTC time & date"-screen.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 79 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Set date (only valid for "Set UTC" Menu):
When [ S2 ]/SET DATE is pressed a new date can be entered:
SET UTC DATE
ENTER NEW DATE :
CURRENT DATE
:
00 -08. 18
00 .08. 18
(YY :MM:DD)
The entry of a new date follows the guidelines of entering numbers, see section 5.6.1. Once
the selection is finished, the operator press the [ ENT ] key and the Operating Panel updates
the date, and returns to the "Set UTC time & date"-screen. By pressing [ ESC ] the Operating
Panel skips the date correction and returns to the "Set UTC time & date"-screen.
When Local Time is selected the following display appears:
SET LOCAL TIME
s| SET
TIME
|S|ZONE
|£3| TIME
|2|ADJUST 11i\ +60
|S| TIME
Ml
-60
Set Time (Local Time setup):
When [ SI ]/SET TIME is pressed a new offset value can be entered relating local time to
UTC time:
SET LOCAL TIME
UTC TIME
NEW OFFSET
:
CURRENT OFFSET :
09:51 :40
10:00
10:00
( + -HH:MM)
The entry of a new time follows the guidelines of entering numbers, see section 5.6.1. Once
the selection is finished, the operator press the [ ENT ] key and the Operating Panel updates
the time, and, returns to the "Set Local Time"-screen. By pressing [ ESC ] the Operating
Panel skips the time update and returns to the "Set Local Time"-screen.
Zone Adjust:
When [ S2 J/ZONE ADJUST is pressed a new adjust value can be entered:
ENTER NEW TIME ZONE ADJUST VALUE:
ENTER NEW VALUE
CURRENT VALUE
60
60 MINUTES
The entry of a new time follows the guidelines of entering numbers, see section 5.6.1. Once
the selection is finished, the operator press the [ ENT ] key and the Operating Panel updates
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 80 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
the +/- time, and, returns to the "Set Local Time"-screen. By pressing [ ESC ] the Operating
Panel skips the +/- time update and returns to the "Set Local Time"-screen.
Change Time Relatively:
If [ S3 ]/TIME+<Zone A d j u s t > or [ S4 ]/TIME-<Zone A d j u s t > is selected, the following display appears respectively - xx is the current value of <Zone Adjust> described
above:
CHANGE LOCAL TIME
INCREASE THE PRESENT TIME xx MIN.
S
|s
QUIT
2 ACCEPT
CHANGE LOCAL TIME
DECREASE THE PRESENT TIME xx MIN.
S
|s|
2 ACCEPT
|1| QUIT
The value of xx or <Zone Adjust> is the number of minutes that the present time will be increased/decreased when pressing [ S2 ]. The value is displayed in the standard format. The
value is normally set to 20, but it can be customised to any value between 1 and 60.
5.7.4 Lamp Test
Activation of the Lamp Test softkey results in sounding buzzer, flashing indication field
"FAULT" and all LEDs of the Operating Panel turned ON until [ ESC ] is pressed.
The following picture appears during Lamp Test:
*** LAMP TEST - - PRESS [ESC] TO STOP ***
970.125.212
]
Lyngsø Marine
i)
Page 81 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
5.7.5 Select UTC or Local Time (priv. access level 1)
If select UTC or Local Time is chosen, the operator first has to enter a password and then select local or UTC time:
ENTER PASSWORD
- LEVEL
1:
SELECT UTC OR LT TIME
S
|1
QUIT
S SELECT
2
LT
5.7.6 Enter Commissioning Mode (priv; access level 4)
Commissioning mode means that activation of [ ALARM ACKN ] - when in Basic or Alarm
List mode - will acknowledge all alarms, even though they are not displayed on the LCD.
To enter commissioning mode the operator must enter a password successfully. Hereafter the
following display appears:
ENTER COMMISSIONING MODE :
S
1
OFF
ON
The maintenance LED flashes as long as the system is in commissioning mode (or in System
password level). Once the commissioning mode is entered, it is maintained until it is deselected from this menu or the Gamma Micro CPU is reset.
5.7.7 Change Password - Level N (priv. access level N/N+l)
If one of the password changing functions are selected, the following display is presented:
ENTER PASSWORD
970.125.212
- LEVEL
N:
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 82 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
When a correct existing password is entered for level N or any higher level, the operator is
prompted for a new password as well as confirmation of the new password for level N:
CHANGE PASSWORD
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
CONFIRM PASSWORD
- LEVEL
- LEVEL
N:
N:
A valid password may consist of any number of characters from two to six.
Each character must be a digit from zero to nine. Any character is echoed as * at the LCD display of the DMS2100i Operating Panel.
A password entry is finished by pressing [ ENT ].
5.7.8 Enter System Password Level (priv. access level 4)
If the system password level is selected, the following display is presented:
ENTER PASSWORD
- LEVEL
4:
Enter system password level (level 4) means that all Operating Panels enter the highest password level. The password level is maintained until it is deselected again. This means that a
service engineer can set the system in the system level and then perform all functions without
entry of password. To enter the system password level the operator must enter a password
successfully, thereafter, the following display appears:
The maintenance LED flashes as long as the system is in system password level. Once the
level is entered, it is maintained until it is deselected from this menu or the Gamma Micro
CPU is reset.
5.7.9 Select LOP-UCS Control
NOTE:
This fonction is only included with the Maintenance functions in a fully integrated
environment including the DMS2100i and the UMS2100 Alarm System.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 83 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
5.7.10 Watch Dog Activation (priv. access level 4)
Entering watchdog activation the operator is prompted for the highest priority level. When this
is entered the following display appears for 15 seconds. Thereafter the DMS2100z system is
restarted with the same functionality as if the reset button had been pressed at the Gamma Micro CPU:
ENTER PASSWORD
- LEVEL
4:
ETERNAL LOOP ENTERED!
The watch dog activation resets the DMS2100/ system, however, the database remain intact,
i.e. definition of channels, names of persons, passwords, etc.
5.7.11 Store Setup (priv. access level 4)
When entering S2: "Store Setup" activation the buzzer sounds for one second and the operator
is prompted for the highest priority level. When this is entered the present setup of the
DMS2100/ is stored, the Operating Panel returns automatically to the Maintenance Menu and
the buzzer sounds for one second:
ENTER PASSWORD
- LEVEL
4:
SELECT MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
Is
WATCH
S| STORE
DOG TST 2| SETUP
970.125.212
S
3
s| MORE
4|
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 84 of 98
2002.07.12
5.8 Dimmer Mode
hi dimmer mode, the operator is able to control:
• The LCD displays background light
• View angle adjustment of the LCD display
• The LED illumination.
• The folio background light of the keys.
When [ DIMMER ] is pressed, the LCD display prompts the operator to select what he wants
to dim:
SELECT DIMMER FUNCTION
S VIEW
|1 DISPLAY 2 ANGLE
|s LCD
S LED
|S|BACK3 DISPLAY |4|GROUND
When the function is selected, the intensity is adjusted by use of the [ *• ] and [ • ] keys. The
intensity is updated immediately, and the LCD display indicates the present selection as
shown below:
ADJUST THE LCD INTENSITY
SETTING: * *** _
ADJUST BY USE OF:
970.125.212
\
AT
AT
1
Lyngsø Marine
CO
Page 85 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
6. DMS2100/ Alarm Indication and Trouble Shooting
New alarms in the DMS are activating the internal buzzer in the DMS panel, and shown in clear text on the Basic Mode Overview Picture when they
come up, i.e. the oldest unacknowledged alarm is shown on line four. When the alarm has been acknowledged by first pressing [ STOP HORN ] and
then [ Alarm Ackn. ], it will disappear from line four (it can now be found in the Alarm List selected by means of the [ Alarm List ] key), and the next
unacknowledged alarm will show up on line four.
A Customising Tool database printout containing all included alarms in this actual DMS2100/ configuration is appended at the end of this chapter. The
following table contains a description and a trouble shooting description for all possible alarms in the DMS2100/, but please note that only the alarms in
the appended print-out is included in this system. The alarms are sorted alphabetically according to column DMS ALARM TEXT:
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
DMSA21F1
Autom. Supply (IFM401) FUSE Fl
DMS1ELSH
Bridge Telegraph El-shaft fail
DMS_MALF
DMS System Malfunction
DMS1T011
DMS1T01 Pickup 1 fail
DMS1T012
DMS1T01 Pickup 2 fail
970.125.212
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
24Vdc supply for Automatic control sensors
missing.
Check fuse Fl on the IFM401 module, and
input to REM401 module DMS1M102, input
13
Check the Electrical Shaft system for the
Bridge Telegraph for failure indications or
power failure
Check the DMS for other module and fuse
failures
Check the connections for Pickup number 1
on the Tacho Adapter Module
Check the connections for Pickup number 2
on the Tacho Adapter Module
Only if Electric Shaft failure alarm is going
to the DMS instead of directly to the alarm
system
Optional Common alarm for all new DMS
supervision alarms
Cable failure on DMS 1 TOI Tacho Adapter
Module Pickup number 1
Cable failure on DMS1T02 Tacho Adapter
Module Pickup number 2
^Marine
Page 86 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
DMSTOUMS DMS-Alarm Syst. Interface Fail
DMSTOEGS
DMS-EGS2000 Interface Fail
Gx_to_M
GAMMA x: Alarm Net
GxJLOPl
GAMMA x: Comm. To PCS Panel 1
Gx_LOP2
GAMMA x: Comm. To PCS Panel 2
Gx_STAT
GAMMA x: Database Status
SNyTOx
GAMMA y: STL Net to GAMMA x
970.125.212
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Only if Serial Modbus Interface to Alarm
System
Only if Serial Interface to EGS2000
Check wiring from DMS SIO module to
Alarm System serial interface input module
Change to Manual ECR control, because the
EGS2000 loses its RPM setpoint and Governor Stop signal. Check wiring from DMS
SIO module to EGS SIO module
Error on the Alarm net communication to the Check the Alarm net connection from the
DMS to the Master Gamma. This can be
Master Gamma. Only in case of Alarm net
made as RTN2100 net from a RS485 SIO
integration with UMS2100
channel, or a Stella net from a DSN module.
Communication error from Gamma CPU to Check power supply to panel, if OK check
ECR panel
connection from Gamma SIO connection to
ECR panel.
Communication error from Gamma CPU to
Check power supply to panel, if OK check
Bridge
connection from Gamma SIO connection to
Bridge panel.
Call Lyngsø Marine for service. If possible
The loaded database and program in the
load the Gamma i rom the connected operator
Gamma Flash Prom is disturbed
station.
Check the Stella net connection from the
Error on the Alarm - and Control net from
the DMS to the master Gamma and Graphi- DSN module in the DMS to the Master
Gamma
cal Operator Station. Only in case of
Alarm/Control net integration with
UMS/UCS2100
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 87 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
ME1GIF03
Governor Cancel Limits
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Cable failure on the Woodward Governor
Cancel Limits valve. NOT included with
serial interface to EGS2000
Only if EGS2000 failure alarm is going to
the DMS instead of directly to the alarm system
Failure on Speed Setting Output signal to
Governor
Cable failure on the Woodward Governor
Stop valve. NOT included with serial interface to EGS2000
24Vdc supply for Lamp Test missing.
Check fuse F3x and wiring to the Woodward
Governor Cancel Limits valve
DMS1_EGS
Governor Failure
ME1GOVSP
Governor Speedsetting Error
ME1GIF02
Governor Stop
DMSA21F4
LPtest Supply (IFM401) FUSE F4
MANSLOWD
DMSA21F2
Manual Slowdown, Reduce RPM
Manual Supply (IFM401) FUSE F2
Manual Slowdown Alarm input is activated
24Vdc supply for Manual control sensors
missing.
ME1ST07
ME1ST08
ME1_BRGC
ME Ahead Valve Failure
ME Astern Valve Failure
ME BRG TLG CMD Failure
ME1_BRGA
ME BRG TLG Misaligned
Cable failure on the Ahead solenoid valve
Cable failure on the Astern solenoid valve
Bridge setpoint potentiometer cable failure
alarm
Compares analog Bridge stop setpoint with
binary stop switch
970.125.212
Check for alarms on the EGS2000 Control
Unit panel
Check wiring to I/P Converter
Check fuse F3x and wiring to the Woodward
Governor Stop valve
Check fuse F4 on the IFM401 module, and
input to REM401 module DMS1M102, input
16
Reduce manually RPM setpoint to Slow
Check fuse F2 on the IFM401 module, and
input to REM401 module DMS1M102, input
14
Check fuse F32 and wiring to Ahead valve
Check fuse F33 and wiring to Astern valve
Check the wiring of the Bridge Telegraph
setpoint potentiometer
Check that the Bridge Telegraph stop switch
is activated when the Bridge Telegraph is in
stop position
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 88 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
ME Control position fail
ME1_POS
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The Control Position feedback's are inconsistent with the present Control Position
ME1_SCR1
ME Critical Speed Range 1
Main Engine running inside critical speed
range 1
ME1_SCR2
ME Critical Speed Range 2
Main Engine running inside critical speed
range 2
ME1SHD04
ME DPS: Emergency Stop
The DPS has stopped the Main Engine due
to activation of one of the Emergency Stops
Check wiring and activation of:
Remote pressure switch P9,
Manual ECR/Auto Bridge changeover switch
in ECR console and corresponding DMS
inputs
Local pressure switch P2,
Governor remote engaged switch S 6
If RPM setpoint from DMS to governor is
outside the critical speed limit, check the
Governor, otherwise check the DMS setpoint
system.
If RPM setpoint from DMS to governor is
outside the critical speed limit, check the
Governor, otherwise check the DMS setpoint
system.
Se on the DPS panel-Alarm List, which
Emergency stop is activated. It must be deactivated and the Telegraph lever put in stop
position to reset, before trying to start again
ME1SHD05
ME DPS: Overspeed Shutdown
ME1_ECRC
ME ECR TLG CMD Failure
The DPS has stopped the Main Engine due
to an Overspeed Shutdown
ECR Setpoint cable failure alarm
970.125.212
Check the wiring of the ECR Telegraph setpoint potentiometer. Only used for Order
recorder
* Lyngsø Marine
Page 89 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
ME1_ECRA
ME ECR TLG Misaligned
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Compares analog ECR stop setpoint with
binary stop switch
Check that the ECR Telegraph stop switch is
activated when the ECR Telegraph is in stop
position
Check the wiring of the ECR Telegraph setpoint potentiometer. Only used for Order
recorder
Press the "Limits Cancel" key once more to
remove the Load Limit Cancel again
ME1_EMGC
ME EMG TLG CMD Failure
Emergency Telegraph potentiometer cable
failure alarm
ME1_LLC
ME Limits Cancelled
ME1_NOF
ME Max No Start Exceeded
ME1SHD07
ME1SHD08
ME1SHD09
ME1SHD10
ME1 SHDN
ME1_SLDN
ME Mechanical Shutdown alarm 1
ME Mechanical Shutdown alarm 2
ME Mechanical Shutdown alarm 3
ME Mechanical Shutdown alarm 4
ME NON Cancellable Shutdown
ME NON Cancellable Slowdown
Main Engine limits has been cancelled by
pressing the "Limits Cancel " key on the
DMS panel
The DMS has reached the maximum number
of start attempts, normally 3
DMS2100z not used
DMS2100* not used
DMS2100/not used
DMS2100z not used
DMS2100z not used
A NON-Cancellable Slowdown, e.g. the
Oilmist Detector, has been activated
ME1_REPS
ME Repeated Start
ME1_SHDA
ME Shutdown Active
970.125.212
The DMS has made an unintended stop, and
will be automatically started again
DPS has stopped the ME due to a Shutdown
Put the Telegraph lever in stop position to
reset, before trying to start again
When the NON-Cancellable Slowdown condition has been cleared, it can be reset the
normal way
Put the Telegraph lever in stop position to
reset, before trying to start again
When the Shutdown condition has been
cleared, put the Telegraph lever in stop position to reset, before trying to start again
]
Lyngsø Marine
Page 90 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
ME Shutdown Cancelled
ME1_SHDC
ME1SHD20
ME1SHD21
ME1SHD22
ME1SHD23
ME1SHD24
ME1SHD25
ME1SHD26
ME1SHD27
ME1SHD28
ME1_SHDP
ME Shutdown input alarm 1
ME Shutdown input alarm 2
ME Shutdown input alarm 3
ME Shutdown input alarm 4
ME Shutdown input alarm 5
ME Shutdown input alarm 6
ME Shutdown input alarm 7
ME Shutdown input alarm 8
ME Shutdown input alarm 9
ME Shutdown Prewaming
ME1_SLDA
ME Slowdown Active
ME1_SLDC
ME Slowdown Cancelled
970.125.212
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
The DPS Shutdown has been cancelled from
the "Shutd. Cancel" key, either from the DPS
panel or from the DMS panel in control.
DMS2100z not used
DMS2100z not used
DMS2100* not used
DMS2100/not used
DMS2100I not used
DMS2100/ not used
DMS2100z not used
DMS2100i not used
DMS2100z not used
A Shutdown Input to the DPS has been activated, and will activate the Shutdown and
stop the engine in a few seconds.
DMS has reduced the RPM setpoint to the
Governor to Slow due to a Slowdown input
is activated.
Press the "Slow Down" key on the DMS
panel to display the list of possible active
Slowdown inputs
Press the "Shutd. Cancel" key once more to
remove Shutdown Cancel, when it is no
longer necessary
If necessary, press the "Shutd. Cancel" key to
cancel the Shutdown before it is stopping the
main engine.
When the Slowdown condition has been
cleared, press the "Slowd. Reset" key on the
DMS panel or reduce the Telegraph lever
setpoint on the active control position below
Slow position to reset, before increasing the
speed again
Note: the DMS can be configured to accept
reset only from ECR
Press the "Slowd. Cancel" key once more to
The DMS Slowdown has been cancelled
from the "Slowd. Cancel" key from the DMS remove Slowdown Cancel, when it is no
longer necessary
panel in control.
Page 91 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
ME1SLD01
ME Slowdown input 1
ME1SLD10
ME1SLD11
ME1SLD12
ME1SLD13
ME1SLD14
ME1SLD02
ME1SLD03
ME1SLD04
ME1SLD05
ME1SLD06
ME1SLD07
ME1SLD08
ME1SLD09
ME1_SLDP
ME Slowdown input 10
ME Slowdown input 11
ME Slowdown input 12
ME Slowdown input 13
ME Slowdown input 14
ME Slowdown input 2
ME Slowdown input 3
ME Slowdown input 4
ME Slowdown input 5
ME Slowdown input 6
ME Slowdown input 7
ME Slowdown input 8
ME Slowdown input 9
ME Slowdown Prewarning
ME1_SLF
ME Slowturning Fail
ME1ST05
ME Slowturning Valve Failure
ME1ST10
ME Stair distrib. AH 1 Valve
970.125.212
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
When indicating cable failure, check the wiring from the IOM402 module to the censor
contact and the 8k2 kOhm cable fail resistor
ME Slowdown input 10 is activated or fail
As for input 1
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 11 is activated or fail
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 12 is activated or fail
ME Slowdown input 13 is activated or fail
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 14 is activated or fail
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 2 is activated or fail
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 3 is activated or fail
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 4 is activated or fail
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 5 is activated or fail
As for input 1
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 6 is activated or fail
ME Slowdown input 7 is activated or fail
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 8 is activated or fail
As for input 1
As for input 1
ME Slowdown input 9 is activated or fail
If necessary, press the "Slowd. Cancel" key
A Slowdown Input to the DMS has been
activated, and will activate the Slowdown of to cancel the Slowdown before it is reducing
the RPM setpoint to slow
the engine in a few seconds.
ME has been slowturning without the tacho Put the Telegraph lever in stop position to
system counting 1.5 revs within the time-out reset, before trying to start again
Cable failure on the Slowturning solenoid
Check fuse F36 and wiring to Slowturning
valve
valve
Check fuse F3x and wiring to Start Air DisCable failure on the Start Air Distributor
tributor Ahead valve 1
Ahead valve 1. MCC engines only
ME Slowdown input 1 is activated or fail
^Lyngsø Marine
Page 92 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS210(M
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
ME1ST11
ME Stair distrib. AH 2 Valve
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Cable failure on the Start Air Distributor
Ahead valve 2. MCC engines only, number
ofcylinders>9
Cable failure on the Start Air Distributor
Astern valve 1. MCC engines only
Cable failure on the Start Air Distributor
Astern valve 2. MCC engines only, number
of cylinders > 9
The start air pressure is below the 15 bar
limit for start blocking
Cable failure on the analog start air pressure
transmitter
ME has been running on starting air without
reaching the firing speed within the time-out
Main Engine Start Blocking has been cancelled by the operator
Check fuse F3x and wiring to Start Air Distributor Ahead valve 2
ME1ST12
ME Stair distrib. AS 1 Valve
ME1ST13
ME Stair distrib. AS 2 Valve
ME1CFG01
ME St.Air Pressure Low
ME1CFG01
ME St Air Transmitter failure
ME1_SAP
ME Start Air Time Exceeded
ME1_BLC
ME Start Block Cancelled
ME1_BLA
ME Start Blocked
Main Engine is Start Blocked
ME1ST03
ME1ST04
ME Start Valve Failure
ME Stop Valve Failure
Cable failure on the Start solenoid valve
Cable failure on the Stop solenoid valve
970.125.212
Check fuse F3x and wiring to Start Air Distributor Astern valve 1
Check fuse F3x and wiring to Start Air Distributor Astern valve 2
Check the start air pressure
Check the wiring to the Start Air pressure
transmitter
Put the Telegraph lever in stop position to
reset, before trying to start again
Press the "Select key/DMS Start Stop System" and use Si-Cancel Off to remove Cancel Start Blocking again
Press the "Start Block" key on the DMS
panel to browse the list of startblockings
Check fuse F30 and wiring to Start valve
Check fuse F31 and wiring to Stop valve
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 93 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
ME1_RPM1
ME Tacho 1 Error
ME1_RPM2
ME Tacho 2 Error
DMS1AI01
Module DMS1AI01 (AEM402) Error
DMS1C001
Module DMS 1 COO 1 (SIO) Error
DMS1C002
Module DMS1C002 (SIO) Error
DMS1C003
Module DMS1C003 (DSN) Error
DMS1M101
Module DMS1M101 (IOM402) Error
DMSM101F
Module DMS1M101 (IOM402) Fuse
DMS1M102
Module DMS1M102 (REM401) Error
970.125.212
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
DMS RPM signal lower than DPS tacho sig- Press DMS panel "Select/DMS Control
nal
Functions/ME Tacho System" to select between tacho 1 (DMS) and Tacho 2 (DPS)
and Auto select.
From this display press "Status" to browse
the RPM inputs and fail indications for both
Tacho 1 and 2.
DPS RPM signal lower than DMS tacho sig- As for Tacho 1 Error
nal
Error on Analog input module AEM402
Check ribbon cable from Gamma CPU to
AEM402. If OK change module.
Error on the first Serial Interface module
Check ribbon cable from Gamma CPU to
SIO module. If OK change module.
Error on the second Serial Interface module Check ribbon cable from first SIO module to
second SIO module. If OK change module.
Check ribbon cable from first SIO module to
Error on the Dual STELLA Net module.
Only in case of Alarm/Control integration
second DSN module. If OK change module.
via Stella Net to UMS/UCS2100
Error on the Input Output Module for digital Check ribbon cable last SIO/DSN module to
MIC40 adapter and from MIC40 adapter to
supervised input and output
IOM402 module. If OK change module.
Check the fuse on IOM402 module
24Vdc supply on IOM402 module
DMS1M101
DMS1M101 missing
Check ribbon cable from IOM402 to the
Error on the first Relay output and digital
REM402 module. If OK change module.
Input Module
1
Lyngsø Marine
Page 94 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
DMS ALARM DMS ALARM TEXT
ID:
DMSM102F
Module DMS1M102 (REM401) Fuse
DMS1M103
Module DMS1M103 (REM401) Error
DMSM103F
Module DMS1M103 (REM401) Fuse
DMS1M104
Module DMS1M104 (AAM401) Error
DMSA21F3
Sensor Supply (IFM401) FUSE F3
STRTFAIL
Start Failure Alarm Output
DESCRIPTION
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Check the fuse on REM401 module
DMS1M102
Check ribbon cable from the first REM401
to the last REM402 module. If OK change
module.
24Vdc supply on REM401 module
Check the fuse on REM401 module
DMS IM 103 missing
DMS1M103
Check ribbon cable from the last REM401 to
Error on the Analog Output Module.
the AAM401 module. If OK change module.
24Vdc supply for additional sensors missing. Check fuse F3 on the IFM401 module, and
input to REM401 module DMS1M102, input
15
Start air or Slowturning time-out or max. no Put the Telegraph lever in stop position to
of start attempts
reset, before trying to start again
24Vdc supply on REM401 module
DMS 1M102 missing
Error on the second Relay output and digital
Input Module
The buzzer is started for a short time "Beep" at Bridge Panels or ECR Panel dependent on control location when:
•
Activation of DMS Panel Hardkeys on a panel which is not in control
•
Activation of DMS Control Functions Softkeys on a panel which is not in control
•
Start request for Main Engine with one or more start blockings.
970.125.212
1
Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 95 of 98
2002.07.12
7. DMS2100/ Customising Tool Print-Out
7.1 Input/Output List Terminal Board Report
This section contains a Terminal Board Report printout from the CT2100 Customising Tool, listing
all Input and Output channels on the DMS2100* Input/Output Modules.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 96 of 98
2002.07.12
7.2 Output Functions List Report
This section contains a Output Functions report print-out from the CT2100 Customising Tool, listing all Output channels which are made as a software fonction by the CT2100 Customising Tool.
970.125.212
pLyngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 97 of 98
2002.07.12
7.3 DMS2100/ Function Blocks List Report
This section contains a DMS Function Block Report print-out from the CT2100 Customising Tool,
with a page for each of the software Function Blocks that are used in the DMS2100i, and for each
Function Block all Inputs to and Outputs from the Function Block is listed.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
cçr
Page 98 of 98
2002.07.12
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100Z
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
8. DMS2100/ Components and Spare-parts
8.1 Hardware Components List
The DMS2100/ contains the following hardware modules:
NAME
DESCRIPTION
NO:
TYPE NUMBER
Panel
DMS Operator Panel
2
962.017.500
GAMMA Gamma micro PLC/CPU Module
1
962.002.800
SLM401
Serial Interface Module with two channels for connection 1 or 2 962.002.300
to the Tacho Adapter, EGS2000 Governor, optional Serial
link to alarm system, optional Manoeuvring printer and a
service/load channel
DSN401
Dual Stella Net module for optional integration with Oorl 962.002.600
UCS2100 Alarm- and Control System
TAM
Tacho Adapter Module for RPM pickups
1
962.015.000
AEM402
8 channels Analog Input Module, Resistance, Voltage or 1
mA inputs
962.004.200
MIC40
Input/Output Adapter, Gamma to digital I/O modules
1
962.002.900
IOM402
16 Digital Input and with cable supervision
12 Digital Output with cable supervision
1
962.004.700
REM401
16 Digital Input and 8 Relay Output
2
962.003.400
AAM401 4 channels Analog Output Module, 0/4-20 mA or 0 - 10 1
Volt
962.009.000
F1M405
Filter Module for 24 Vdc Power Supply
1
962.004.100
EFM401
Interface modules for solenoid valve outputs
1
962.003.600
IFM402
Interface module for digital input & lamp indications
1
962.003.700
NEC432
24V DC/DC converter for Start Air Pressure
1
962.009.700
The DPS2100 Safety System included in the DMS2100/ Main Cabinet is made by means of the following modules:
NAME
DESCRIPTION
NO
TYPE NUMBER
Panel
DPS Operator Panel
1
962.019.000
DZM402 RPM Tacho Module
1
962.003.110
IOM402
16 Digital Input and 12 Digital Output, both with cable 2 or 3 962.004.700
supervision
F M 405
Filter Module for 24 Vdc Power Supply
970.125.212
1
962.004.100
^yngsø Marine
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100*
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 99 of 98
2002.07.12
8.2 HW Modules Layout and Jumper Settings
This section contains a Layout drawing for each module included in the DMS2100/ showing jumpers, set-up switches, LED indications, EPROM positions etc.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Gomma Micro Bus
o
^
o
Co
O
u
O
1
y
LED
to
Q
rrupt
V
scon
Q.
«
• ^
0V
24V
F 2.0 A
CM
e
e
e
e
ÎZ
CM
Unit ID switch S I : Bil 1-6 is used lo select Gommo Unit number 1-40 by meons of binary numbers.
Unit ID switch S I : Bit 8=on is used to select the Gommo os "Moster" in cose of dotobose error (for dotobose lood purpose), from versionl.71
Mode
Mode
Mode
Mode
Mode
Ver.
switch
switch
switch
switch
switch
S2: Bit 7 is used to select between: Application mode=on, or Monitor mode=off.
S2: Bit 6 is used to resel Ihe dotobose stored in the Flosh-prom, requires Monitore mode, i.e S2-bit 7=off
S2: Bit 1-3 is used to select bose oddres 0 - 7 for the SIO module used for monitor ond lood channel
S2: Bit 4=on meens thot no SIO module is ovoiloble for monitoring ond toad chonnels
S2: Bil 5 is used to select the SIO chonnel used for monitoring ond lood terminal, ofhchonnel 1, on=channel 2.
Type No: 962.002.800
Fäe
Orw.
Chk.
Chk.
Dale
Ver.
Dole
Orw.
File
Dole
962\O13301
HAK 00.07.10
Original: 962\013301
Gamma Micro
Jumper settings
_
_
Date
Dote: 00.07.10
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.30 1
Sheet 1
1 lota
1
2
s
3
6
A
A
^—
CHASSIS 00
e
GND(OV)
e
e
e
e
O
"3
DSR
o
o
r-
DTR
Ml
g
RXD
*
CN"
CTS
o
CM
TXD
Q:
to
UJ
01
CHASSIS 00
GND(OV)
x j3 S
: cS
ë
Ü
5
KJ
5
S
CN
X
n.
o
-r CM ~
5ë
H
O
L
=§
.S
RXD
CN
CTS
tn
°=
TXD
RTS
x"
O
!
Q.
Lu
DTR
x
O
11
C
O
o»
oj
il
RS48!
c
1-
x'
O
J
0 O
t/>
t
G
1
CO
e
e
CN
e
e
0
in
e
e
CN
+RA
—
10
e
e
e
e
GND(OV)
-RA
o
Q>
IM
ID
-RA
in
CN
CHASSIS
• « •
CN
—-
e
e
e
e
f
I
O
t>
CM
0
t
e
e
e
e
e
S3
F 5 0 0 rrt
CN
Gomma Micro Bus JP7
—
e
F
O
mounted'
O
m
111 cc
>
5 -i s 1 «
-Q
• * •
K)
+RA
00
S
-
m
-RA
+RA
SEGR
-s
CN
to
SEC.M
X
• *
GND(OV)
-RA
+RA
M
in
CHASSIS
SEG.R
Oj
D.
O
m
p»
DSR <x> 0
t >«
D. X
o o
^^
e
CN
RTS
r
B
PRO
B
<o
Mou nting 0
- HI
JP6
36/
Gommo Micro Bus
e
e
-•
G
OY
24V
<=»
Prog. Sel Ch. 1 ond Prog, sel Ch. 2
Progrom !selected:
Eprom Sze Jumper settings
H
27C512
jFjpj
Progrom selected depends only on
type no. of the Programmed Eprom
27C040
«[ES
Programed Eprom type "SI/O Rev. B, 970.404.960
Progrom selected: CTN2100 (RS485)
27C040
2 ^M
4 »H
z »••
H
Programed Eprom type "SI/O Rev. B, 970.404.96C "
Progrom selected: Std. SI/O (RS232)
1 KSffo
Type No: 962.002.300
J
Ver
1
2
3
K
Chk.
Drw
Date
HAK 00.07.11
File
962\013311
Serial
Date
Interface Modul» ^ l ^1401
Jumper settings
1
2
Date
J
Dale
Oft.
Dote: 00.07.10
P Lyngsø Marine
ç 162.
3
Drw
Ver
File
4
5
Original- 962\01331 1
«c>heer 1
013.31 1
5
-1
6
tota
K
Gomma Micro Bus
CHASSIS
GND(OV)
OSR
o
a;
O
en
Q.
Q_
a.
O
O
Screen
B
A
Screen
B
A
O
on/off
0
o
CM o
KH
DO O WÊ\
-
Gommo Micro Bus
BS o
S2
S2: Normol mode selected by meons of
S2 - 7=on, oil others oil
Gommo Micro bus "Bose oddress" 0-15 is selecled
by jumpers J20, J21, J22, J23
EPROM SIZE
Size:
27C010
27C020
27C040
27C080
ver.
Fus
962\013431
nA
B
B
B
JF9
JP10
A
A
B
B
A
A
A
B
Drw.
Date
HAK 00.07.11
0
l
2
3
4
5
6
7
Oik.
Status LED's
Rx Mosler
fa Reserve
Idle LED
Interrupt LEO
Tx Reserve
Tx Moster
Rx Reserve receive error
Rx Mosler receive error
Dote
Ver
Type No: 962.002.600
Drw.
File
CWt
Date
Dare-. 00.07.10
Original: 962\013431
Dual Stella Net Module DNM401
Jumper settings
Dote
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.43 1
5
Sheet 1
1
total
INPUT + / -
10V, PT100[öj
INPUT 0-20mA
[Ê
Type No: 962.004.200
Ver
File
962\013321
Drw
Date
Cl*.
HAK 00.07.10
Date
Ver
Drw
File
Original 962\013321
Analoge Input Module AEM402
Jumper settings
Date
O*.
Dare
Date 00.07.10
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.32 1
Sheer 1
1
Mal
PU 1
PU 2
DIVIDER DIVIDER
1
WWi m
2 o o o o
4
o o
o o
16 o o
8
PU 1
PULS
El
PU 2
PULS
El
o o
o o
o o
El
PU SYNC
ALARM
El
Kl
PU 1
PU 2
ALARM
ALARM
OVER SPEED
ALARM
PU SYNC
PULS
E
El
o
PU
c>-">SYNC £ 3 £c?
PU 1 PU 2
r
n
FI = 1A
NPN
Ü ni
PNP
o
?l
IHl
1
11
S11
la
I
o
y o
o
röjON
oFF
H lil
]
L
2 3
4 5
© ©
© © ©
i
2 3
© © © ©
4
M
)1
1
5
©
4
1 2
3 4
(D J3 © © © © J5
2 3
© © ©
1
•il ©
2
3
© ©
1
2
© © J/
1
4
1 2
3 4
V J4 © © © © J6
a)
2
© J8
Type No: 962.015.000
Ver
Fie
962\013401
Drw
Core
Lhk.
Date
Ver
FHe
Drw
Dole
0*.
Dote
HAK 00.07.10
00.07.10
Original 962\013401
1
Tacho Adapter Module TAM401
Jumper settings on EGS1TAMO1
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.40 1
Sheet 1
1
rota
1 2 4 8
faillia
n fi i l 1
i l a II
• i 8i|[oj[oj[ojo
9
Base
adr.
JP 6 7
CO
ca
J2
co
to
en
ca
2
Ö
o
o
c—
o
F 3.15 /
Jb
J4
FI
JP3
1 2 ,3 4
e e e e
£
>
CM O
i
|o
Reloy +24V olwoys on
I
Reloy +24V controlled by CPU "Watch-dog
J1
i
~
Type No: 962.002.900
Ver.
file
960\013351
Drw | Dafe | Chk. I Dafe I Ver.
HAK 00.07.101
Drw. | Date | CI*. I Da»e
Original: 962\013351
Dafe: 00.07.10
1
MIC40 Adapter Module
Jumper settings
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.35 1
5
Sheet 1
1
total
01X
10
no
010
X20!
en
O
60
O- •
80
O- r
°I
sn
in
°l
90
X12I
•
en
o» >
o» •
o» •
50
o» •
°\
o- >
in
6X
X11
Exlernol sensor supply
lnternol sensor supply
Wire breok monitoring
Type No: 962.004.700
Va962\013371
Drw. Date
Chk.
HAK 00.07.10
Dole
Ver.
Drw.
File
Original: 962\013371
Di Input/Output Module IOM402
Jumper settings
Dote
0*.
Dote
Date: 00.07.10
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.37 1
Sheet 1
1 total
etx
X15
®l
®
I 83 I
I
8a
I
y
93
"S3~
01
001
01
0!
01
Internal Sensor Supply
External Sensor Supply
Relay supplyed fron the +24V Vatchdog Relay
Relay supplyed directly Fron the 24V
Type No: 962.003.400
Ver
File
962\013361
Drw.
Dufe
Chk.
Date
Ver.
Drw.
File
Dote
Chk.
Dote
HAK 00.07.10
962\013361
DI/Relay Out Module REM401
Jumper settings
Dale 00.07.10
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.36 1
Sheet 1
1
6
total
eu
ce«
•53 <
3ELL
tsa
3H3Ï
SIM
I se 3
3*
£®4
9E3 I
91» _ J
5;
X
X
sea
X
»ta
0\H
g £ 3 i BC3
533 <
S3 I
133 <
I E3
I
953T
Type No: 962.009.000
Ver.
File
962\013411
Orw
DQfe
Chk.
Oofe
Ver.
FJe
Drw.
Dofe
Chk.
Dote
HAK 00.07.10
Original: 962\013411
Analog Output Module AAM401
Date 00.07.10
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.41 1
Sheet I
1
lotol
OUTPUT
OV
OV
GND
+24V
+24V
X2
1
2®
3®
4®
5®
OUT
INPUT
IN
OV
GND
+24V
+24V
+24V
0
X1
Type No: 962.004.100
Ver.
File
962\013421
Drw. Dote
Chk.
HAK 00.07.10
Filter Module FIM405
Date
Ver.
Drw.
Date
Original: 9 6 2 \ 0 1 3 4 2 1
Date 00.07.10
Chk.
Dote
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.42 1
Sheer 1
1 total
D|» =
©
©
Ver
File
962\013441
Drw
Date
Chk.
HAK 00.07.10
Date
Ver.
Type No: 962.003.600
Drv
Date
O*.
File
Dafe 0O07.ia
Original 962\013441
>
Interface Module IFM401
Date
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.441
Sheet 1
1 rota
en
•
CO
o
ro
•
(O
O)
o
(D
I
O
fO
<D
a
O
O
O
Q)
—I
«••»
cn
'
O
10
CD
[NO
LL
X2
1
X9
r—i
1
o ø
00
oo
oo
2 3
4
5
O 7 8
2 3 4 S O 7 8
X9
' V
9 1O11 121314 Ig1O 17 18 19 20 21222324282027282930 31323334383037383940
9 1O 11 12 13 141S 1O 17 18 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 8 2 0 2 7 2 8 2 8 3 0 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 0 3 7 3 8 3 9 4 0
DDGGDGDDGDGGDDDDDDDDDDDDGDGODGDGD
"ir"
i r~T/
11 • i r —\f
\~i ' \ t ~\ i
\i
i / ~vr
n
\
f
O
o
O O
l@OOOOOOO©OOOf
O t N O t N O t M O C S O C N
^ ^
3 3
S
= J 3 D 3 D 3 D 3 3 3
0.0.0.0.0.0.1X0.0.0.
s o o o o o o o o o o
o
1)1
Ver.
File
962\013461
i y—n-
M
oo
11 M
Drw.
F
\
M
Date
ii
ii
o
i i rr~
Chk. Dote Ver.
Type No: 962.009.700
Drw. Oate
O*. Date
File
HAK 00.07.10
Original: 962\013461
DC/DC Converter NEG432
Dafe: 00-07.10
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.461
Sheet 1
1
fötal
Diesel Manoeuvring System, DMS2100/
User Manual for MAN B&W MC/MC-C Engines
Page 100 of 98
2002.07.12
83 Spare-part List
The appended Spare Parts List show the fuses and lamps, which is included in the standard
spare part set as required by the Classification Societies.
Of course we will be glad to offer you a bigger or full set of spare parts. All units mentioned
previously in this chapter could be relevant. Please contact our Spare Parts department for
price and delivery time.
End of document.
970.125.212
p Lyngsø Marine
Description
Number:
Oullln«
fuse 500mA
ceromic
type:
062 480.124
2000
10
20 00
10
Fuse 2A
ceromic
type:
062.480.129
2000
10
Fuse 3.ISA
ceromic
type:
062.480.131
2000
Fuse 1A
ceromic
type:
062.480.128
Working
Units
Ploced in
ponels
Ploced in
1OM4O2
RM401
10
]
Ploced in
2000
type:
062 480.133
10
IFM401:
F t . F3, F4
3
Fuse 2A
ceromic
type:
062.480.186
Ploced in
Moin Fuses:
F11, F12, F13
F23, F24
Ploced in
DZM402
IFM401: F2
10
Fuse 5A
ceromic
Remarks:
20 00
Ploced in
ZM411
10
(GAMMA MICRO)
Ploced in
Fuse 1 6A
ceromic
type:
088 632.140
10
F30-36
F40, F41
Lornp 28V
1.2 W. T5.5
type088 642 010
10
25
Ploced in
ECR Indicotion
Ponel
lamp
extractor
T2
type:
062 532.598
10
Lomp 28 V
40 mA
type:
062.452 314
10
Ploced in
Stork Kwont
Bridge Telegraph
15 87
11
Type no. for oil items: 921.244.200
Ver
File
921244201
921244202
921244203
Drw
Date
Chk.
HAK 00.05.03
HAK 00.08.02
HAK 01.02.22
Dote
Spare Parts List
DMS2100Î and DPS2100
with Stork Kwant Telegraph
3
Ver
Fite
921244204
Original- 921244201
Drw
Date Chk.
MWJ 02.08.12 MSS
Dote
02.08.12
Dote-. 00.05.03
Lyngsø Marine
921.244.20 4
Sheet 1
1 total
'CONSOLE!! CONSOLE!
I WING PS 11 WING SB I
BRIDGE CONSOLE
ECR CONSOLE
START
AIR
START
AIR
INDICATION
PANEL
BRIDGE PANEL
DMS 21OOi
INTERFACE
DC 24V
_._]_,L.L._.±
TERMINAL STRIP «
I I
TERMINAL STRIP » J
fSHIP'S ' GENERAL ALARM '
~1
MONITORING AND
ALARUS
CONTROL SYSTEM
j_TYPE UMS/UCS _2100_
j
PCS CABINET
INTERFACE 1
PICK UP
DPS 2100
OVERSPEED EUERG.STOP
CONTROL UNIT
DMS 2100Î
CONTROL UNIT
INTERFACE 2
"1 ' " S E N S O R " 1 f " V
* . . BVB * .
.J I
I
i
I iDLUHLI\O * J
I
• YARD SUPPLY
ALL CABLE DIMENSION ARE MAX. CONFIGURATION
2
_3_
V*.
910\048\52»01
910\O48\52»01
uss
(H.iaO6
Dot«
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 21001
CABLE DIAGRAM
910.048.52
2
2totol
CABINET
DMS1C001
DMS 2100Ï
DMS1M102
SI0401
SERIAL
INTERFACE
REM401
DIGITAUNPUT/
OUTPUT MODULE
TERMINAL
REMOTE
SUPPLY
DPS 2100
-A1010
DZM402
SPEED RELAY
MODULE
I
I
SERIAL INTERFACE
EGS 2000
ELGOVERNOR
ECR
910\048\52»02
Ore.
M.io.oe
IBS
04.10.06
Pol»
Oik.
Dirt»
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
| Dole
T
Lyngsø Marine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
T
CABLE DIAGRAM
910.048.52
TYPE DMS 2100i
T
T
( O B A S I C RULES FOR SCREENING:
( Q ) ALL CASING PARTS OF CABINETS, BOXES, CONSOLES ETC. HAVE TO BE CONNECTED
WELL CONDUCTED:
- CONNECTED SURFACES HAVE TO BE METALLIC BRIGHT (IF NECESSARY COVERED WITH PETROLEUM JELLY)
- HF-STRANDED WIRES HAVE TO BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, MAX. 5 cm
- IF NECESSARY TAKE RATCHED WHEELS (FOR EXAMPLE FOR SIDE WALLS, FLANGE PLATES ETC.)
MOUNTING WITHOUT CABLE ENTRY GLANDS:
HF-STRANDED
WIRE
Q ) CABLE SCREENS HAVE TO BE CONNECTED TO GROUND OR TO THE CHASSIS AT BOTH ENDS OF THE CABLE.
NOTE 1
Q ) THE CABLE SCREEN IS CONNECTED TO THE CHASSIS AT BOTH ENDS OF THE CABLE BY MEANS OF CONICAL
CABLE ENTRY GLANDS IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIN 89280 AND VG 88812 RESPECTIVELY.
SCREEN ON SERIAL
COMMUNICATION CABLES
MUST END MAXIMUM 5 cm
BEFORE CONNECTION PLUG
Q ) THE SCREEN MUST BE CONNECTED TO SCREEN BARS PROVIDED FOR THIS ON CABINETS/CONSOLES
WITHOUT CABLE ENTRY GLANDS.
© I F SCREENS/CABLES ARE RUN VIA TERMINALS ONCE AGAIN INSIDE THE CONSOLE/CABINET,
THE SCREEN HAS TO BE CONNECTED TO THE GROUND IN FRONT OF AND BEHIND THE
TERMINAL, IF NOT SPECIFIED IN CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
©UNCONNECTED EXCESS CORES OF CABLES HAVE TO BE CONNECTED TO THE CHASSIS,
IN ORDER TO EXCLUDE A POSSIBLE AERIAL EFFECT OF THE UNES.
TWSTED CORE PAIRS
UP TO TERMINALS/MODULES
O ) IN AREAS SUBJECT TO HIGH HF INTERFERENCE THE SCREEN HAS TO BE CONNECTED AT ONE END TO
THE CHASSIS AND AT THE OTHER END OF THE CABLE IT MAY BE ADVISABLE TO CONNECT THE SCREEN
TO A CAPACITOR (APPROX. 1,1uF/400V) FIRST AND THEN CONNECT IT TO THE CHASSIS.
(2)MANUFACTURING INSTRUCTIONS:
£ ï ) WRING. IF NOT SPECIFIED 0,5mm »
FILTERED VOLTAGE DC 24V HAS TO BE LAYED FROM THE EXIT OF MAINS FILTER MODULES (RM...)
TO FUNCTION MODULES BEHIND THE MOUNTING PLATE
(CABLES OF DIFFERENT VOLTAGE SYSTEMS (DC 24V / AC 230V) HAVE TO BE
SEPARATED OF SPACE:
- NOT PARALLEL TO OTHER VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
- USE SEPARATED CABLE CONDUITS
- SPACE BETWEEN DIFFERENT VOLTAGE SYSTEMS MOcrn
(T) LEGEND:
a i CHASSIS I
GROUND CONNECTION
HF STRANDED WIRE
MAX LENGHT 5 cm
© POTENTIAL EARTH
TWISTED CORE PAIRS IN CABLES:
1+2, 3 + 4 , 5+6, ...
IBS
910\048\53»ör
FI«
Dr».
Dote
Ok.
Dot»
TWISTED CORE PAIRS
UP TO TERMINALS/MODULES
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
T
Lyngsd Marine
SCREEN ON SERIAL COMMUNICATION CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED
TO THE SCREEN BAR.
MAX LENGTH OF STRANDED WIRE 5 cm.
THE SCREEN MUST NOT BE BROKEN BUT SHOULD C0NT1NIUE
TO APP. 5 cm BEFORE THE CONNECTION PLUG.
SEE NOTE 1.
CABLE CONNECTIONS
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
910.048.53 1
7
I
-A2051
NEG432
)MS1FO1
OUTPUT + 24V"
OUTPUT
INPUT
.
DMS1T01 TACHO ADAPTER
TAM401
MODULE
>
FIM405
FILTER MODULE
DC/DC CONVERTER
INPUT
OUTPUT
-XI 7
-X2 5
2
P
-X1 1
Q
1.5'
»/14.1
5
Q
-XI 4 -X2 3
Q
O
1
Q
DMS1
DMS1C001
CTp7
GAMMA
-X10
"
1A
SIM401
J P 6
_
SERIAL
MICRO
af
F1||
0.5A I
DMS1A101
AEM401
4
p
INPUT
STELLA NET
-J2 1
2
-J2 3
MODULE
-Jl
9
MODU
ODULE
OV-J2ONC
- JJ2
2ON
<?
-J2 1
2
o
-J3 1
°2
O
i
3 '
O—
3
HF-STRANDED WIRE
5
»TO OPS /2.5
\
7
O
MAM401
MIC 40
ADAPTER MODULE
=o
-™t I
Z
2A
2A
>
9iaO46.171
ÇJL
Ô
Ô
24V
OV
UPS
o
sp
I
1
1
o
o o
\
'
l
XT
o
'- nr ns
BRIDGE
T
DOUBLE TERMINAL
-A2301
• YARD SUPPLY
ECR
PANa
PANEL
OMS 21001
DMS 21001
CONSOLEj (_ECR_CONSOL£_
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Ortmot
ONLY TERMINALS MOUNTED ON RAIL !
O
-A2302
LBR1DGE
Dot«
-J1i 2
HF-STRANDED WIRE
TB<>
Oik.
0
L | i
n T Î Converter
DC/DC
Owg:
Dot«
1
1
o-o
INPUT
o-o
1
1?
-F23[
-J2
ovA2q
+24VA2Q. '
+24VA20. '
On.
-J71
HF-STRANDED WIRE
\
/2.8>- O
-J5
0VA20,
Fie
4
"
1.5'
\5\
DMS1M100
04.10.06
-X10
DUAL
INPUT
INPUT
RGND
2,52v
USS
-X9
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
V
-X11
910\048\53»Q2
:
-JP6
ANALOG
HF-STRANDEO WIRE
.^»OPTION
DMS1C002
DNM401
WRING 0.75 mm« IF NOT OTHER SPECIFICATION
Lyngsø Marine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
DC 24V
910.048.53 1
TYPE DMS 2100J
T
SUPPLY
T
—i
T e s CABINET"
DMS1C001
~
-JP5
~JS>6
GAMMA
MICRO
910\048\53a03
-J21
O
04.10.06
2
O
SERIAL
_jp6
±
_L
-J31
O
2
O
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Ortftofc
_-
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
INPUT
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
MODULE
SIM401
| Del»:
DMS1C002
j)NM401
MAM401
DMS1M100
MIC 4 0
ADAPTER MODULE
> -X10
d ?
INPUT
DUAL
STELLA NET
o %
o
o 1o
II-
DMS1A101 DMS1
AEM401
<— —>fK—
MODULE
-J11
2
o o
-J2
d d
CO
% O
1
O
% Q
1
0
DMS1M101
I0M402
DMS1M102
REM401
DMS1M103
REM401
DMS1M104
AAM401
-»-X10
-X9_x]0
-»-»o
-X9-xio
DIGITAL
IN/OUT
MODULE
DIGITAL
IN/OUT
MODULE
DIGITAL
IN/OUT
MODULE
ANALOG
OUTPUT
MODULE
4
O
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
Lyngsø Marine
TYPE DMS 21001
i
5
F
BUS CONNECTION
910.048.53
»tot 3
23 total
fPCS CABINET
i
DMS1
GAMMA
MICRO
UNIT ADDRESS: 1
ON
-SI
OFF ON
OFF ON
0-0
O-o
O-O O
o-o o
SEGMENT M
—>
-JP6
F
RS 485
SEGMENT R
SS §
SEGMENT M
SS§
+
I OL
+3 I4 OLS
P O O
SEGMENT R
+ 1 ae
3 4 5
0 0 O
-J11 2
O 0
MOUNTING PLATE
MOUNTING P U '
L.
FWGCS
2x2x0,75
FMGCC
2x2x0,75
2x2x0,75
SCREEN BAR
SCREEN
-X17 S
O O
-A2301
-X1 11 10 12
O O O
:» i
-X1 5 4
- X i 13 14 15
O O O
KA2302 o o
SS §
-X2:
+ I
Ver.
USS
910\04ä\53»04
On..
Dot«
- X I 11 10 12
O O O
o
a
• ON
'OFF'
I ON
3 OFF
ADDRESS: 128
0
ADDRESS: 129
ECR
PANEL
DMS 2100J
BRIDGE
PANEL
DMS 2100J
ECR CONSOLE
1
2
3
o
t— t—
ON
5 ON
OFF -X4P S OFF
6
04.10.06
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Origin*
B
j
lOole
Lyngsd Marine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100J
I
5
F
5? G L CO 1 SOI £
i
PANEL CONNECTION
910.048.53 1
**,{
4
ir
CPCS CABINET
SIM401
DMS1C001
C—
BUS TERMINATION
-JP7
ON
DFF
ON OFF
ON
o-o
o-o
o-o o
o-o o
-JP2i
OFF
O-O O
ae
ae:
RS 4 8 5
o
-J4 1 1 2 2
O-O O-O
5 5
O O
SEGMENT M
SEGMENT R
se
-JP3
o-o o
CHANNEL 2 EGS2000
SEGMENT M
SERIAL INTERFACE
BUS TERMINATION
1
2
MODULE
4
PROGRAM
SELECTION
FDR EACH
CHANNEL
B
ON OFF
O-O O
O-O O
CHANNEL 1
RS 485 SEGMENT R
:
i
o
9
6
Oi
e
~
9
Os o
1 o
4
1
o
?
O
%
1O
—>
-JP6
CH 1
CH S
CHANNEL 1 TACHO
BASE ADRESSi 0
RS 2 3 2
ai
3 3 4 4
O-O O-O
-J5 1 1 2 2
O-Ô Ô-Ô
5 5
O-O
3 3 4 4
O-O O-O
-J11
O
MOUNTING PLATE
3x2x0.75
J
L
NFHGCO
' 2x2x0,75
CH0/J202|E
D C
O O
EGS 2000
BASIS CB
RS485
EGS 2000
ELECTR GOVERNOR
910\048\538Ö5
Dra
Dota
Chk.
Dote
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Crtihd:
I Dots:
Lyngsd Marine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
i
!
T
SERIAL INTERFACE
910 048 53 1
23 total
PCS CABINET
DMS1M104
AAM401
EGS2000
SETPOINT
ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE
SPEED SIGNAL
CH2
CH1
DAU
DAU
-X1
o
+u - u
- X 1 5 If
O O
+u - u
(SPARE)
SPEED SIGNAL
CH3
CH4
DAU
GND
-X21
-X2 5 le
o O
•u -u
:
6 61
+u
-u
TO DPS / 5 - 7
XIO l
RPU INSTRUMENT ADJ.
1
2
3
%.
910\0«\53a06
Fie
Drw.
0410.06
USS
Dote
Chk.
04.10.06
Dote
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Ortotwfc
I Dote:
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100Î
SPEED INDICATION
910.048.53 1
7
I
: PCS CABINET
I
DMS1T01
DIVIDER
TAM401
ADAPTER MODULE
TACHO
PU2
DIVrø
PÜ.SY.C
I OFF
I OFF
PICK UP
PICK UP
PICK UP
CM
+
-J3 1
O
C5
2
O
o
3
O
4
O
+
-J4 1
Q
o
>
c-j
xn o
2
0
3
0
4
0
o
>
+ C? o
-J5 1
O
2
O
3
O
o
o
z
4
O
-J6
PU2
ALARM
PU1
ALARM
OVER SPEED RELAY
o
1
2
z
-J7 1
3
O
-J8i
•»/17.3
ALK
»/17.3
P
MOUNTING PLATE
AL2.
NG PUTE
MOUNTING
-X+4
-CFRDM DPS / 1 0 3
-X3:4..
I DPS / 1 0 . 5
^7x2x0.75
r11
"1
TACHO
PICKUP
JUNCTION BOX
TYPE:
o
ô
0
PICK UP
N0:1
06Z486.003
DISTANCE FOM SENSOR
PICK UP
NO: 2
TO TEETH FACE
SHALL BE 1..4mm
ENGINE ROOM
i
2
3
Vtr.
W.10X6
910\048\53a07
n«
Dr..
Dote
USS
041006
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB, 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
I Dote
T
Lyngsd Marine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
i
s
r
ENGINE SPEED
910.048.53 1
/I7.3
r
PCS CABINET
PROCESS
REM401
DMS1M103
AUTOMATIC
SELECTED
\s\
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
MANUAL ECR
LOCAL ER
MAIN START VALVE
SELECTED
SELECTED
IN SERVICE
CH1
• CH2
\
• CH3
CH4
-X2 1
+24V
ovA-,C/9.1
X1
-A2200
"
.L3+
^/19.2
\'
-X14
/I8.5^
>/19.3
IFM402
\r \
INTERFACE
MODULE
-X2 4 ' " 5 I
-XII
O—l
LT1,
o—i
L3+,
-XI2M
-X12 21
p—
r
12
-A2101
INDICATION
PANEL
.
li
-X111
9 11
ÎÎ
INDICATION PANEL
'"1 BR-ECR
SWITCH
ZS7I0
•'-L12
ECR CONSOLE
-L3V
-L11
L_
ovA-,</9.2
\FWGCG_
' 14x2x0,75
-A2102
ELBOX
EMERGENCY CONTROL
ovA-,</9.5
•MM.5
SFWGCG
I
'4x2x175
'CJ 9 _<
I
BVB
49
U_
ENGINE ROOM
-P9 PSC680
O4.10.C6
910\048\533Ô8
Dr..
Pol«
USS
Oik.
04.10,08
D(rt»
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
OrVitKt
I Dot»
-P2 PSC6S4
Lyngsø Marine
J
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
50 ' JM1 ] I
-S3 ZS664
DIGITAL INPUTS
910.048.53 1
r pcs CABINET'
I
PROCESS
DIGGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
REM401
DMS1M103
MAIN START VALVE
BLOCKED (FWE)
START AIR DISTR.
OPEN
• CH5
TURNING GEAR
DISENGAGED
r CH6
GOVERNOR
ENGAGED
CHS
f T r CH7
•X2 5
+24V
O V A - . /10.1
/aa^
-A2200 IFM402
. i-TI
• J.T2
START AIR DISTR.
BLOCKED
-X1
-X212
29
' 7 TURNING GEAR
ENGAGED
GOVERNOR
ENGAGED
LT1 .
LT2
</iaz
INTERFACE
MODULE
13+ /1O1
\FMGOS
-A2101
INDICATION PANEL
-L2 V
-L4V
-L7 V
-L9V
-Lf
ovA-,</10.2
ECR CONSOLE
L..
,.J
\Tvooe
-A2102 +24V?
."{I,4
ELBOX
EMERGENCY
CONTROL
ENGINE ROOM
NFMGCS
' 4x2x0,75
10
11
—o
OVA-,
\FMGCG
'2x2x0.75
r
?'_<f_ _JMT]
iÜ
[JM2 '
F >
'
* ,
: o—
O—
1 ^ , 4
L.
910\Q*3\53s09
-S-t ZS664
USS
-S5.! SZ666
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB, 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Crtjhct
1
-S6ZS653
- » ZS667
Lyngsø Marine
I
j
o~
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
• JUMPERS TO BE
MOUNTED BY
ENGINE BUILDER
|
DIGITAL INPUTS
910.048.53 1
»heet 9
J
I
r pcs CABINET'
REM401
DMS1M103
CAMSHAH
ASTERN
PROCESS
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
CAMSHAFT
AUX BOWERS
CONTROL AIR
AHEAD
START BLOCKED
PRESSURE LOW
1-CH12
• CH9
-X4i
+24V
/9.8<
23
-A2200
• J.T2
-X1 20
LTK
V"
i
-X2I20S ' 21Ï
-I 6—)
, J.3+
25
/a.a4JJL_
IFM402
INTERFACE
MODULE
LT2 /13.5
22
-X12J0
L3+</23.3
'24x2x0,75
^0(1 io
-A2101
INDICATION PANEL
-L10
J I-SW1
Î/4
OVA-,
ECR CONSOLE
1_
\FUGCG
'14x2x0.75
-A2102
ELBOX
EMERGENCY
CONTROL
h24V
ENGINE ROOM
+24V
'4x2x0,75
,^_ ' JM2 ] I
JM2
O—
L.
910\048\53a10
__
3
Vw.
-S7 ZS6S0
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 k 04130001/2
Ortqlnofc
.. J
Lyngsö Märine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
DIGITAL INPUTS
910.048.53 1
23told
m
r
I
PCS CABINET
DMS1M103
REM401
START AIR
PROCESS
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
SAFETY AIR
PRESSURE LOW
PRESSURE LOW
FUSE
MONITORING
hCH15
rCHH
CH13
SPARE
X4 5
+24V
\FVIGCS
r
29
JM2
-P13 PS410
ENGINE ROOM
M.10.C«
_3_
y».
FI«
Dr».
Dot«
USS
04.10.06
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 k 04130001/2
Ortghct
I Dole:
Lyngsø Marine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100Ï
DIGITAL INPUTS
910.048.53 1
'
i
Mtotol
F PCS' CABINET
DMS1M101
IOM402
START
VALVE
STOP
VALVE
PROCÈS? '
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
REVERSE
AHEAD VALVE
CUTOFF
SPARE
REVERSE
ASTERN VALVE
SEALING AIR
VIRE BREAK
V I R E BREAK
DA4
-X5l
tt
VIRE BREAK
DA5
-X5 5
L1+,
-F30
-F31 1
1.6A FF
1.6A FF
-F32Ï1.6A FF
-F34'
-F35 1
1.6A FF
1.6A FF
1.6A FF
IFM401
INTERFACE
MODULE
-X3 2
-X2 4
-F33 1
? -4
-X4
-X12.17 L2+
/10.8
-A2100
-X4
10
/1J.4
NMCCC
ECR CONSOLE
-AH
-AS
TELEGRAPH HANDLE
i r
REMDVE JUMPER
I
SETVEEN 18 AND 23 •
-S3
-S6
-S7
MANUAL CONTROL LEVER
I20
..J
\MCCC
BVB
19*
1
2
3
Ver.
910\048\53a12
UWI 04.10-M USS
Dr«.
Dot«
Chk.
04.t0.06
Dots
19*
84
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
OriqtKt
I Dot«:
ENGINE ROOM
Lyngsø Marine
88
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
910.048.53 1
2itotol
r ' pcs CABINET"
i
I0M402
PROCESS
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
J
SV-ST 28
EV 68
i
2
3
V».
O4.10.iD6
Dr..
Dot«
USS
04.10.06
Dot»
L...
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Oriqlrxt
ENGINE ROOM
I
.. J
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
910.048.53 1
'
r
DMS1AI01
PCS CABINET
AEM402
ANALOG INPUT MODULE
MONITORING
STARTING
SPEED
AIR
ENGINE RPM
FROM DPS
I?
+
o
-X4il3
X13 7
/2.2 .0V/L26
:A8
FROM DPS
2
<?
.+24V/L26
3
C
4
9—
5
O—
K/5.8
l_..
•'24x2x0,75
^ FUGCS
'4x2x0,75
SfUCCG
'2x2x0,75
•'7x2x0.75
\FUGCS_
•'7x2x0,75
zH'X'ü
&
Al . AS
nMO
0
START AIR
ECR
CONSOLE
START
AIR TRANSMITTER
*
|_ENGINE_ROOM j
YARD SUPPLY
M.10.06
910\048\53sl4
Dm.
Dot«
USS
04.10.06
Pol«
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Origin*
I Dote
|
ECR
ih
I
H|
»L
BRIDGE CONSOLE
||
Lyngsà Marine
START AIR
START AIR
.J!
_B_RIDŒ
'I
|
|
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
i;
START AIR
STBD. WING
I ' l l
BRIDGE
||
ANALOG INPUT
910.048.53 1
TYPE DMS 2100i
T
iIIi
PORT WING
T
BRIDGE
I
1
|
ir
PCS CABINET
\FUCCS
'4x2x0.75
'4x2xft75
TB MAIN
UG
9
TB HAIN
UG 9
32
2K
2K
2K
en—
ASTERN
=^—
ASTERN
AHEAD
ECR TELEGR.
j
910\04B\53»15
__
V».
n«
Dr..
ECR CONSOLE
Ctik.
Dote
j
I Dote
Wqrat
T
AHEAD
BRIDGE TELEGR.
L.
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Dot«
" 22 ~ ]
TLG_
<!
ASTERN
AHEAD
BRIDGE EOT TELEGR.
OPTION
BRIDGE CONSOLE
..J
Lyngsø Manne
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100Î
i
•
r
ANALOG INPUT
sheet 15
23 total
910.048.53
T
[PCS CABINET
I
DNM401
DMS1C002
DUAL STOLA NET
C—
OFF
MODULE
—>
-JP6
-JP7
OFF
ON
O-O O
-JP1.2 "O-O O
O-O
ON
0
-JP3.4
SEGMENT R
SEGMENT M
-J5 1 2 3 4 5 6
O O O O O O
—J6 1 2 3 4 5 6
O O O O O O
I
CHANNEL 1
BASE AODERS. 1
RS 2 3 2
5
5 5
INTERFACE TO ALARM SYSTEM
SEE UMS2100 DRAWINGS
MANOEUVRING ORDER PRINTER SHOWN IN UMS2100 DRAWINGS
L..
910\048\53a16
UWJ
Dfw.
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Dota
Ole
Dot«
[Pote
—J11
-J7 1
2
O—O
Lyngsø Marine
MOUNTING PLATE
,J
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
i
i
STELLA NET
910.048.53 1
TYPE DMS 2100J
r
diert 16
23totd
!PCS CABINET
I
DMS1M102
REM401
S H A H GENERATOR
ON MSB
TACHO
PICKUP 2
BUZZER
STOP
UP 7
CH_2
•-n
PROCESS
DIGITAL INPUT/OUPUT MODULE
GOVERNOR
OFFLINE
ALARM
CH4
CH_5
EMERGENCY
STOP ALARM
OVERSPEEO
ALARM
CANCEL
SHUTDOWN
FROM OPS
CH6
FROM DPS
CHJ
FROM DPS
CH8
V
II
tt
II
X 1-X2 5
HP L — b +24V
+24V
/7.8
.+24V
m-M-
sFUGCC
'4x2x0,75
f
L8O
OL7
DO-CB
!
'I
I
EGS 2000
ELECTR.
GOVERNOR
JB5 j
|_ J__
j_BMCC CONSOLE J
910\048\533i7
04.1006
Dm,
Dole
LBS
Oik.
M.10-C8
Dote
See page ESS 17
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 k 04130001/2
Orfcjhot
I Dole:
T
Lyngsø Marine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100Î
DIGITAL INPUTS
910.048.53 1
'
i
*eet 17
23 total
REM401
910\048\53»18
U«J
M.10.06
Dnr.
Doit
uss
04.10.»
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Ortfrct
[ÖQtK
T
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
Lyngsø Marine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
DIGITAL INPUTS
910.048.53
23totol
REM401
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
CLOSED IN
s! OW—fiOWN
SHUT-DOWN
UP 1 BW PANEL
ip 7 Bw PAWFI
ER A L A R M
UP 3 BW PANEL
BMS m l
UP 4 BW PANEL
REDUCE RPM
UP5 BW PANEL
HORN
UP6 BW PANEL
BRIDGE CONTROL
SUPPRESSION
EOT ALARM
CH24
AC 250V/1500VA I
DC J2V78A
IFM401
INTERFACE
MODULE
AUTOMATIC
HANIW.
EGS 2000
ELECTR. GOVERNOR
E
L
910\04a\53»19
LOCAL
^
USS
04.10.06
J L.
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Originofc
I Dote
See page ESS 17
TB5
"BMCC CÖNSOTE'
Lyngsø Marine
J [JRIDGE CONSOLEJ
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100J
s
\
T
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
910.048.53 1
[PCS CABINET"
DMS1M101
I
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
IOM402
SLD 1
SLD 2
SLD 3
SLD 4
SLD 5
THRUST BEARING
THRUST BEARING
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
HIGH TEMP.
HIGH TEMP.
AHEAD
ASTERN
WIRE BREAK
WIRE BREAK
~ ~ t CH1
WIRE BREAK
CH3
CH2
tt
WIRE BREAK
SLD 6
SPARE
WIRE BREAK
•CH4
•CH5
WIRE BREAK
•CH6
SLD 7
SLD 8
SPARE
SPARE
WIRE BREAK
CH7
WIRE BREAK
CH8
tt
-X2 5
-X2 1
+2+V
+2W
L..
.j
' 2x0.75
\FMGCG
'2x0.75
15 JM6
j_
910\tM8\5Ja20
Dm.
17
JENGINE ROOM
OitOOS
USS
04.10.«
Dote
Oik.
Dot«
.. J
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
DIGITAL INPUTS
910.048.53 1
_
I
20
f~PCS CABINET'
DMS1M101
I0M402
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
SLD 9
SLD 10
SLD 11
SLD 12
SLD 13
SLD 14
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
OIL MIST
SHUTDOWN
SHUTDOWN
CONCENTR. HIGH
ACTIVE
PREWARNING
FROM DPS
FROM DPS
WIRE BREAK
^A CH9
It
ti I
WIRE BREAK
V
It
WIRE BREAK
•CH11
WIRE BREAK
WIRE BREAK
OV
r CH12
CH13-F7'
WIRE BREAK
WIRE BREAK
WIRE BREAK
rCH14
II
II
CH15
r CH16
•H-
•X4 5
+24V
+24V
|
<n?0U DPS /I1.8 -X5'6
<FROM DPS /I1.8
-X5i5.
* T 0 DPS /11.8
,J
\FMGCC
rr-_--_-_
I i o
o JME
OIL MIST i
DETECTOR
I
910\04fl\53a21
n«
UWJ
Drw.
04.10.M
Dote
uss
Oik.
04.10.06
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Dote
T
Lyngsd Marine
I
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100J
DIGITAL INPUTS
910.048.53 1
atotoi
r •
PCS CABINET
PROCESS
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
REM401
DMS1M103
CLOSED AT
DMS ALARM /
STANDBY
POWER FAILURE
CH20
TRANSFER TO
FOR TOP BRACING
CH21
DIESEL GENERATOR
CH22
UMMIT SWITCH 1
LIMIT SWITCH 2
CONTACT CLOSED RPM > 6 0
CH24
CH23
M
n
n
.n
n
n
7
-X8
-X7
/ . I ; 0VA20
8
I*2
-k9\
-K2\
-K3
-K2\
22.2 21
22.2 11
22.3
)
^4x2x0,75
O
O
O
MP
r
Ô
•'
60
ô
6'
MP
MP ..
SHIP'S GENERAL
ALARM,
MONITORING AND
CONTROL SYSTEM
TYPE UMS/UCS 2100
EN«NE CONTROL CONSOLE
uss
910\04B\53»22
M.10.2S
0™.
04.10,08
04,1t»
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
lOot«:
T
I
M
II
I
I CONTROL l j
II
j BOX FOR j j AUXILIARY |
I
\ AUXILIARY |
ISSE1RSIBLOWERS1I
I
(JOPJRACING
PUMP
||
IBL0WERS2I
| |
|
1
Lyngsd Marine
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
TYPE DMS 2100i
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
910.048.53
2
CABINET
AUXILARY
BLOWER 1 RUN
AUXILARY
BLOWER 2 RUN
LAMP TEST
-A2200
IFM402
- X 1 J3
INTERFACE MODULE
o
-X1 32
/12.8>*
S
.
34
36
y.
- X 2 32
,L3J_-X12U_
L3+,
\FMCCC
'24x2x0,75
BLOWER 2
BLOWER 1
46
23
-A2101
10/12
6/8
INDICATION PANEL
-LP20
- I P23
-LP21
-X153
57
[_ECR_ CONSOLE
\fuoce_
<" 14x2x0,75
r
5
, A JVA-
-A2102
ELBOX
EMERGENCY CONTROL
r,
h
r
|
I
i
I
j
L..
910\048\53s23
ENGINE ROOM
GUANGZHOU SHIPYARD
NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
Orfcjtxt
X2-1 '
O
AC220V
X2-3 ' X2-2
O
O
RUN
AUTO
X2-6' ~ X2-8 X2-7 '
O
O
O
AC220V
RUN
AUTO
i
II
BOX
:
1
AUXILIARY '
BLOWER 1M
iBLUÏÏtR
I
: BOX
:
' AUXILIARY '
BLOWER 2
| DLUWtK
Lynasö Marine
BOX
AUXILIARY
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
AUX. BLOWER
910.048.53
TYPE DMS 2100i
T
BLOWERS CONTROL
T
23 total
T
BRIDGE MANOEUVRING SYSTEM
DMS 2100i
ALARM
100 %
FAULT
Type no
962 017 500
MANB&W 2-stroke, fixed propeller
Orw I D a l l
I Chk
I Pol.
lOUihcfc
»«001.11
Lyngsd Marine
Bridge Manoeuvring System
DMS 2100-1
Operating Panel Lay-out
962 017 59 1
278
Fixtures. 4 pcs. supplied
Cut-out for
'//////////////////s///////////////
276
max. 72
52
48
Terminal Row
max. 13 mm
Type no's :
962.005.500 (MBD DMS/B)
962.005.600 (MBD DMS/E)
962.005.700 (MBD DPS)
962.008.300 (NSD DMS/E)
962.008.400 (NSD DMS/B)
962.008.800 (NSD DPS)
Weight: 1.4 kg
All dimensions in mm.
Enclosure protection of front: IP 44
DM3 2100/DPS 2100
Panels, Outline
Flush Mounted
JOB/
16 09 96
JRK/
17.10 97
962.008.002
POWFR
F
RS 485
RS 485
EXTERNAL
SEGMENT M
SEGMENT R
ALARM
FIRE
" I F Input / O u t p u f i r Input / O u t p u f i r
RELAY I F ALARM " 1
Panel Adress
©ØGGGGGØGØØØØGØGØGØGGQØØ
Power
Supply
Reloy
Supply
FÏ
F2
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819
20 2 1 2 2 2324
F 500 mA F 500 mA + <
<=> g. i + o
<
S
3
^ <° *
3
-o
c -a
c
+
O
X I
<
I
+
- X I X !
O
<
I
+
O
O
.
- X > X ) ' <
<
-r
o
er
fD
o
o
3
fD
O
+
KJ
<<
O
.
Dipswitches
Fire
Supply
m
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
r
O
RS485
Termination
'0'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SS
F 500 mA
'SEG.M*SEG.R
1 2 1 2
SHuBB H B
X2
X3
nn
on
off
X4
-o
"g -g
CD
5"
Q- n
o 3
- a
s?
o
c
-O TD
C
C
o"
3
o
c
3
X2:
Type no's:.
962.005.000
962.005.100
962.005.200
962.005.300
962.005.400
962.005.500
962.005.600
962.005.700
UMS
UMS
UMS
UMS
UCS
DMS
DMS
DPS
2100,
2100,
2100,
2100,
2100,
2100,
2100,
2100,
Basic Alarm Panel, with backlight
Basic Alarm Panel
Accomodation Alarm Panel
Local Operator Panel, 2 lines
Local Operator Ponel, 4 lines
Diesel Manoeuvring System, with backlight
Diesel Manoeuvring System
Diesel Protection System
The position of the switches
changes, depending on the
address for the alarm panel.
X3 & X4: Termination of communication
cable: ON - if last panel in
a string, otherweise OFF.
Universal Monitoring System UMS 2100
Alarm Panels
Connection Terminals
97.01.10
97.08.13
Lyngsø Marine
962.000.06 1
POWER
SUPPLY
24 V INPUT
(LSB)
POWER
SUPPLY
F. EXT. HORN
24 V OUTPUT
A0
A1
(1 = OFF) A2
A3
RS485
SEGM
RS485
SEGR
ALARM
RELAY
FIRE
ALARM
INPUT
Ver.
96200801.1
Date
Drw.
96.11.07 ES8
96200801.2
96.11.18 ESB
File
Chk. App.
Ver.
Rie
Dale
Propulsion Control System PCS 2100
Panels, Connection Diagram
Drw.
Chk. App.
Ver.
File
Date
Drw.
Chk. App.
Lyngsø Marine
9 6 2 . 0 0 8 . 0 1 2 Sheet 1 of 1 sheets
10
3
FRONT VIEW
Cable entry flange (480 x 180)
SIDE VIEW
0-20 ,
MOUNTING PLATE, FRONT VIEW
400
OC/DC Canwtor»
TOP VIEW of Socket
Cable entry
Buttom plates removeable
Ver.
File
910\046\90s01
Drw.
Date
MWJ 03.07.16
3
Original:
92114061 1
Date-000222
Chk.
Date
All dimensions in mm.
Weight: approx. 144 kg excl. STELLA® computer.
Enclosure protection: IP 44
Colours: Cabinet RAL 5005 structur (Signal blue)
Door
RAL 9004 structur (Signal black)
Socket
RAL 7022 structur (Umber grey)
DMS2100i / DPS2100
Bridge Manoeuvring System
Outline
Type no.:DMS Cabinet:921.244.500
Lyngsø Marine
910.046.90 1
Sheet
2
10
1
total
DPS
04
5
o
CM
5§
Side of cob.
t»
S
CXJ
o
cu
o
sw.
TBl-t/2
TBI-V<
CD
00
X
o
CO
X
CD
ru
eu
(=5
S.W.
TB2-J/2
TB2-V4
•
•
ui
_j
m
<
o
o
^
|FIM405|
S.W.
EDF
Ver
FJe
910\046\90s02
Drw
Date
Chk.
Date
Ver
Fäe
Drw
Dote
Chk.
Date
MWJ 03 0716
Original
DMS2100Î / DPS2100
CONTROL CABINET
3
92i\244ioiso2
Date
000222
Lyngsø Marine
910.046.90
1
s
I
1
Sheet
2
total
CM
OTT"
11
GR
GOVERNOR
ENGAGED
16
RD
EMERGENCY
CONTROL
too
TJ-COOJ
111
WH
ECU
CONTROL
IPH
12
GR
START AIR
OKTRR
NSERVCE
17
RD
START AIR
DKTRB.
BLOCKED
112
WH
13
GR
MAIN START
AIR VALVE
H SERVICE
L8
IP« WH
EMERGENCY
STOP
MANUAL
SLOW
TURNING
GR
L13 WH
BLK
BLK
BLK
BUND
PLUS
121
GR
110
TURNNG
CEAR
ENGAGED
BLIND
PlUG
BIHD
PlUG
15
TURNNG
GEAR
DISENGAGED
RO
MAIN START
AIR VALVE
BtOCXEO
BRIDGE
CONTROL
PR
14
GR
FUEL
CAMS
AHEAD
AUX
BLOWER 1
RUNNMG
RD
BIK
FUEL
CAMS
ASTERN
123
GR
BLK
BUNO
PLUG
BLK
BUND
PlUG
BUM)
PlUG
L15 YE
AUX
BLOWERS
WARNING
LP2O WH
POWER OH
i
IAHP TEST
-137-
-137-264-288-
-60-
MAX 135, depending on type
of Blower Control Switch SW1.
o
in
Fixed cable, lenght » 2 m.
with terminal row
All dimensions are in mm
Enclosure protection surface. IP 22
Type no: 921.2W.200
Lamp
• Lamp with Pushbotton
S212V22S UW5
Mârine
ECR INDICATION PANEL
TYPE DMS 2100
LAYOUT AND OUTLINE
921.24229 3
I
~
3 \ZV\Z\Zh
o
0013 SWa 3dAi
13NVd N0I1VDIQNI HD3
GUIJ&IA1 Øs6uÅi
**4QQ|
11 1 ** lis f i r m m •
m
US.
o
DWSJBrO
tn"
' in-
' en- ' n> ' in- ' oi> 'm- ' n-
I/AU
% BI i
' si- ' \n- * la- ' m - «IT^3
UH
<x
UJ/AO
A. >JX£21
MANUAL
SLDV
TURNING
EMERGENCY
-LP16
-LP17
SUPPLY
&
LAMPTEST
AUX
BLOWER 1
AUX
BLOWER 2
-LP20
jr\
n\n
AUX BLOWER
WARNING
.n
15
H4^
I Ii
-SW1
•/e
L
CttURMU
-XI
31 32 M 34 38 M
O O O Ô O Ô Ô
nmsnm "
I»
37 3» M 40 17
Ô Ô Ô O O
970822
93,02:27
Lyngsø Marine
CHB
aitt
4S 4«
6 6*
I 0*. I bott I Orldnol n w i w STI
52
0
15
0
U
O
ECR INDICATION PANEL
TYPE DMS 2100
WIRING DIAGRAM
92124221 3
CO
770 fl
70 0
I III
6 pcs. PG 13 5 for coble
min: 7mm
mox- 14 mm
I
I,
PG 29 for coble
min: IBmm
mox: 30mm
BOTTOM VIEW
f;
3 x 06.5 for 3 pcs. elosticol suspension
(included)
' )] WRONG WAY BUZZER
See drowing 992.402.10 sheet 1 & 2
S06.5
Instrument Box
Emergency Control Stand
50-90 MC MK V
Outline 220X330X150mm
Weight 6 kgs
Colour RAL 7032
All dimensions in mm
SNH
SNH
97.08.14
97.10.17
-j 921.140.19 2
TACHO INSTRUMENT
TO BE SPECIFIED.
SEE UST BELOW
i SHUT DOWN
PREWARNING
(red)
AHEAD
(yellow)
I SHUT DOWN
(red)
I ASTERN
(yellow)
, TURNING GEAR
1
ENGAGED
EMERGENCY CONTROL
(yellow)
I WRONG WAY
(red)
E C.R. CONTROL
(yellow)
, AUX.BLOWER
RUNNING
(green)
I BRIDGE CONTROL
(yellow)
(red)
1
LAMP TEST
(P.white)
COVER
COVER
TACHO INSTRUMENT:
100-0-100
120-0-120
150-0-150
200-0-20C
250-0-25C '
300-0-30C
r/min
rpm
r/min
rpm
r/min
rpm
r/min
rpm
r/min
rpm
r/min
rpm
AHEAD LEFT
088.421.011
088.421.001
088.421.012
088.421.002
088.421.013
088.421.003
088.421.014
088.421.004
088.421.015
088.421.005
088.421.016
088.421.006
AHEAD RIGHT
088.421.051
088.421.041
088.421.052
088.421.042
088.421.053
088.421.043
088.421.054
088.421.044
088.421.055
088.421.045
088.421.056
088.421.046
Type No. for box: 921.140.110
Instrument Box 220X330mm
Emergency Control Stand
50-90 MC MK V
Lay-out
SNH
SNH
97.07.18 SNH
97.10.17
97.11.13
921.140.18 3
y
TACHOMETER
LAMP TEST
AHEAD
ASTERN
TURNING GEAR
ENGAGED
AUX.BLOWER
RUNNING
EMERGENCY CONTROL
ECRXONTROl
WRONG WAY
WRONG WAY BUZZER
BRIDGE CONTROL
SHUT DOWN
CANCEL SHUT DOWN
35
36
EMERGENCY STOP
SHUT DOWN PREVARNING
Terminols:
4 point, occepting 2.5mm 2
Electric Box Emergency Control
for Emergency Control Stand
DMS/DPS 21 Op for 50-90 MC, MK V
Circuit Diagrom
sm 97.0812
* Lyngsø Marine
921.140.10 1
p
2
3
4
BROW N +10-30V
1
A
6
5
X
A
Z>
=>
>
. t
<
UJ
ZD
_J
_j
2Q
CD
J
B
\
C
B
C
1
1
D
5000
D
-l-l
+r
E
E
•
F
W.A.F.24
s
G
ENCLOSURE PROTECTION
WEIGHT: 0.1 KGS
H ALL DIMENSIONS IN MM.
TYPE NO. 062.486.003
I
F
^f r
1
11
J
IP6' i
0
G
•
i
-
STANDARD LENGTH
OF CABLE
IS 5 METERS.
CABLE CAN BE
SHORTENED
IF RFOUIRFD
H
M18x1
J
J
FBe
Ver.
4
5
6
Drw.
90027634.dwg
90027634.dwg
90027634.dwg
Date
AGO 90.06.19
MB 90.10.15
KUL 91.09.09
Chk.
Da te
TSA 90.0 3.19
TSA 90.K).15
TSA 910<).O9
He
Ver.
7
8
Original:
9OO27634.dwg
9OO27634.dwg
90027634dwn
i
2
I
3
Date
LOA.
Date
JNS 98.08.24 MSS 9808.2
DHN 99.03.18 MWJ 99.082
Date: 890531
:
M18 Tacho Pick-up
Outline
K
Drw.
(
p Lyngsd Marine
900.276.34 8
4
5
Sheet
1
tota
K
I»
CADRAINAME FUTE
6x
Rfl
^30rl-.28J.28.L2B,U2B.U2B
nmn
14-65
I—BMS—|—ESS4—f-ESG 4OM
__JMS___JPS|
EGS 2000
MDUKTING HOLES
1
M1M5 = CABLE DIAMETER
MIN = 2 mm
MAX = 6.5 mm
M25x1.5 = CABLE DIAMETER
MIN = 7 mm
MAX = 16 mm
M32xl5 = CABLE DIAMETER
MIN = H mm
MAX = 21 mm
ALL DIMENSIONS IN m a
TYPE OF CASING: Bopla M237 (POLYCARBONAT)
COLOUR SIMILAR TO. RAL 7035 (.LIGHT GREY)
DEGREE OF PROTECTION: IP 65 (EN 60 529)
PART-NO: 814.000.006
gen. loleronces|
surface
date
2105.02
name
Rosch
Rosdf
check 2105.02
norm
scale: 1 : 2
DISTRIBUTION BOX
FOR PICKHFs
sheet
(STN ATLAS Marine Electronics
Menter ol the EüroMarhe Grcxp
L
rev.
rev.-no.
date
name res. (rout
814.000 506
subst. for: 271118 432MB
|repl. by: _MB~
total
LO
MOUNTING
Mox. 40
INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS
Input Ronce: 4-20mA
Scale Background: White
Rgures O-(15): Red
Figures 15-40: Black
(Rgures above for 0-40bar)
bar: Black
Logo: Red
Pointer: Black
Ri: 5ohm
Weight: 0.4 Kg
A!l dimensions in rnrn.
CUT-OUT
type no.:
bar
088.441.100
088.441.101
088.441.102
088.441.103
088.441.104
088.441.105
088.441.106
On Request
0 - 2.5
0 - 4
0 - 6
0-10
0-16
0-40
Instrument 144 x 144 without Light
bar 4-20mA
Outline
JOB/ 07.10.96
371.441.10 1
r
MOUNTING
CUT-OUT
INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS
Input Ronge: ± 10V
Scale Background: Non Lustre Black
Ahead Figures: Yellow
Astern Figures: Red
Ship, Ahead Right: Yellow/Red
rpm: Yellow
Logo: Red
Pointer: Yellow
Light (Ilium.): 24V d c / a c , 70mA
Dimmer NOT Incorporated
Ri:
10Kohm
Weight: 0.4 Kg
type no.:
rpm
088.421.160
On Request
088.421.161
100 -
0 -
100
088.421.162
088.421.163
120 -
0 -
120
150 -
0 -
150
088.421.164
088.421.165
200 -
0 -
200
250 -
0 -
250
All dimensions in mm.
088.421.16 6
300 -
0 -
300
Tacho Instrument 144 x 144 with Light
rpm Ahead Right
+/- 1OV
Outline
m
'
16.09.96
371.421.16 1
12
~\
max. I
r
MOUNTING
INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS
t di
CUT-OUT
'////////////////^^^^^
CM
en
82 5
Input Range: ±10V
Scale Background: Non Lustre Black
Ahead Figures: Yellow
Astern Figures: Red
Ship, Ahead Right: Yellow/Red
rpm: Yellow
Logo: Red
Pointer: Yellow
Light (Ilium.): 24V d c / a c , 115mA
Dimmer NOT Incorporated
Ri:
10Kohm
Weight: 1.1 Kg
088.421.260
On Request
088.421.261
100 -
0 -
100
088.421.262
120 -
0 -
120
088.421.263
088.421.264
150 -
0 -
150
200 -
0 -
200
088.421.265
250 - 0 - 250
All dimensions in mm.
088.421.266
300 -
Tacho Instrument 192 x 192 with Light
rpm Ahead Right
+/-1OV
Outline
JOB/
16.09.96
type no.:
rpm
0 -
300
Lyngsø Marine
371.421.26 1
' \ \
o
ro
in
07-
.150PG 13.5 for cable diameter:
min. 7 mm / max. 14 mm
240.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION:
INSTR.
ILLÜM
.o
B
YELLOW
CD RED
©O
MAX.
ADJ.
eo
oo
so
oo
oo
oo
os
oo
oo
oo
oo
2
"AC/DC
PHOENIX GKDS SUPPLY/MUM
Input Range: ±10V
Scale Background: Non Lustre Black
Ship, ahead right: Yellow/Red
Ahead Figures: Yellow
Astern Figures: Red
rpm: Yellow
Lyngs? Marine logo: Red
Pointer: Yellow
Illumination: 24V dc/ac, 110/220V ac
Ri: 10Kohm
Weight: Approx. 6 Kg
type no.:
rpm
088.421.420
On Request
088.421.461
100 - 0 - 100
120 - 0 - 120
088.421.462
088.421.463
All dimensions in mm.
Tacho Instrument Watertîght
rpm Ahead Right +/-1OV
Outline
J0B
/
16.09.96
088.421.464
150 - 0 - 150
200 - 0 - 200
088.421.465
088.421.466
300 - 0 - 300
250 - 0 - 250
Lyngsø Marine
371.421.46 1
MOUNTING
CUT-OUT
INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS
1W 1
ØADJ (RANGE)
INSTR
A1 A2
ILLUM
X1 X2
y//////////////////////////////////.
Input Range: 4-20mA
Scale Background: Non Lustre Black
Figures 0-(15): Red
Figures 15-40: Yellow
(Figures above for 0-40 bor)
Bar : Yellow
Logo: Red
Pointer: Yellow
Light (Ilium.): 24V dc/ac 56mA
Dimmer NOT Incorporated
Ri: 5ohm
Weight: 0.23 Kg
All dimensions in mm.
type no.:
bar
088.441.050
088.441.051
088.441.052
088.441.053
088.441.054
On Request
0 - 2.5
0 - 4
0 - 6
0-10
0-16
0-40
088.441.055
088.491.247
Instrument 96 x 96 with Light
bar 4-20mA
Outline
ADH
31.05.99
371.441.05 1
f
12
12
ma>n
| p MOUNTING
'e=r~r
CUT-OUT
INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS
xQ
EOT
5.5
LID-
66
Input Range: ± 10V
Scale Background: Non Lustre Black
Ahead Figures: Yellow
Astern Figures: Red
Ship, Ahead Right: Yellow/Red
rpm: Yellow
Logo: Red
Pointer: Yellow
Light (Ilium.): 24V dc/oc 56mA
Dimmer NOT Incorporated
Ri: 10Kohm
Weight: 0.23 Kg
All dimensions in mm.
type no.:
rpm
088.421.020
088.421.061
088.421.062
088.421.063
On Request
100 - 0 120 - 0 150 - 0 200 - 0 -
088.421.064
088.421.065
088.421.066
100
120
150
200
250 - 0 - 250
300 - 0 - 300
Tacho Instrument 96 x 96 with Light
rpm Ahead Right
+/-1OV
Outline
'OB/
16.09.96
371.421.06 1
o
m
en
to
L-13
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION:
YELLOW
All dimensions in mm.
PG 13.5 for cable diameter:
min. 7 mm / max. 14 mm
Input Range: ±10V
Scale Background: Non Lustre Black
Ship, ahead left: Yellow/Red
Ahead Figures: Yellow
Astern Figures: Red
rpm: Yellow
Lyngs? Marine logo: Red
Pointer: Yellow
Illumination: 24V dc/ac, 110/220V ac
Ri: 10Kohm
Weight: Approx. 6 Kg
type no.:
rpm
088.421.420
088.421.421
088.421.422
088.421.423
088.421.424
088.421.425
088.421.426
On Request
100 - 0 120 - 0 150 - 0 200 - 0 250 - 0 300 - 0 -
100
120
150
200
250
300
Tacho instrument Watertight
rpm Ahead Left
+/-10V
Outline
J0B
/
16.09.96
371.421.42 1
moxTi
r
MOUNTING
CUT-OUT
INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS
CO
v////////////////////^^^^
D
CD
cn
5.5
Input Range: ±10V
Scale Background: Non Lustre Black
Ahead Figures: Yellow
Astern Figures: Red
Ship, Ahead Left: Yellow/Red
rpm: Yellow
Logo: Red
Pointer: Yellow
Light (Ilium.): 24V dc/ac 56mA
Dimmer NOT Incorporated
Ri: 10Kohm
Weight: 0.23 Kg
All dimensions in mm.
Tacho Instrument 96 x 96 with Light
rpm .Ahead Left
+/-1OV
Outline
IOB/
16 09.96
IRK/
09.07.14
type no.:
088.421.020
088.421.021
088.421.022
088.421.023
088.421.024
088.421.025
088.421.026
rpm
On
100
120
150
200
250
300
Request
- 0 - 100
- 0 - 120
- 0 - 150
- 0 - 200
- 0 - 250
- 0 - 300
Marine
371.421.02 2
ß
MOUNTING
Max. 40
INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS
CUT-OUT
RJ
a
I»
© | ADJ (RANGE)
INSTR
X1
0
Input Range: ±10V
Scale Background: White
Ahead Rgures: Black
Astern Figures: Red
Ship, Ahead Right: Black
rpm: Black
Logo: Red
Pointer: Black
Ri:
10Kohm
Weight: 0.4 Kg
All dimensions in mm.
type no.:
088.421.140
088.421.141
088.421.142
088.421.143
088.421.144
088.421.145
088.421.146
rpm
On Request
100 - 0 - 100
120 150 200 -
0 0 0 -
120
150
200
250 300 -
0 0 -
250
300
Tacho instrument 144 x 144 without Light
rpm Ahead Right
+/-1OV
Outline
JOB/
JRK/
16.09.96
98.07.14
371.421.14 2
INSTRUMENT
MOUNTING
60
10
CUTTING-OUT
96
70
Input: 4-20mA
Scale Background: White
Text and Markings: Black
Pointer: Black
Ri : <15 ohm
Type no.: 088.440.070
Indicator
Fuel Pump Index in mm
Dimensions 96 x 96 mm
SNH
97.06.11
371.440.07 1
M10 x 0.75
X
(XIX)
0 0
034
010.1
±02
05.2
L=2m
• ^~^
cw
COM
—° !
CCW
° j
o
o
I ro
o
I
D D G
Type no.: 991.406.800
Weight: 0.15kg
Ver.
Be
37118120 dwg
37118120 dwg
37118120dwq
Orw.
O*.
Date
Re
Date
Ver.
3711812O.dwg
TFJ 850828 TSA B5.08.28
5
SDB 9105.16 TSA 91.05.16
KUL 91.07.15 TSA 91.07.15 Original: 37118120 dwq
BUTTON AND POTENTIOMETER
OUTLINE
Drw.
Date
Dote
Chk.
JNS 9808.19 MSS 9808.19
Dat& 85.0828
Lyngsø Marine
371.181.20
Sheet
1
total
6
(O
ø70
Suitable f o r dry damp areas as well as f o r outdoor use. Model f u l f i l s
VDE requirements 0804/2 80
Tecnical specifications:
Housing: Thermoplastic (ABS) high impact, grey.
Terminal: Screw, suitable f o r wiring up to 9 mm
Temperature range: -10 t o +80 C.
Audio frequency: approx. 600Hz.
Sound output; approx. 98dB (A) measured a t a distance of 1 m.
Type of enclosure: IP 43 as per DIN 40050.
Mounting: Sound outlet facing downwards.
Weight: 0.160 kg.
Voltage: 24Vdc.
Rated current: 100mA
Ver.
Drw.
9OO36513.dw9
90036513dw9
Date
TSA 9103.06
Chk.
Date
Ver.
Drw.
Date
CWc
Date
990322
Original:
Diesel Manoeuvring System 900
Buzzer
Outline
I
Be
MSS 910306
2
|
3
Date-.
Lyngsø Marine
900.365.13 2
Sheet
1
total
3
CAD
li REDUCE RPM
4i BMS FAILURE
2i SHUTDOWN
5i BUZZER
3' SLOWDOWN
6i STOP BUZZER
ir
• 144.0 •
T"
—I
76.0
96.0
82.0
"II
M5xl5
•124.0-
Jh
lmm,45*
CUT-DUT-
AU dimensions a r e In mm
-130.0 973905
Shipyard Nb
Drv
Datt
CNt
Dote Ondnol
iDotg
Lyngsø Marine
ALARMPANEL
BRIDGEWING
LAYOUT
91002668 1
60
60
I
MI61 5|
2.8
Connection box
2 x ø4.3
V//////
55
Cut-out
Ponel frame
Counter
Terminals 1 - 2 :
Revolution signal.
Weight: 0.150 kg
O
Digit height: 4mm
Protection class (IEC 144):
front IP 40; connections IP 00
Number of
digits
type no.:
062.496.002
8
062.496.003
Ver.
Without reset
o
With reset
Fie
92120082 dwg
Drw
Date
DHN 990705
CHt
Date
Ver.
Original:
Revolution Counter, DC 24- V
Tacho System
Outline
3
FRe
Drw
Date
Chk.
Date
Date:
Lyngsø Marine
Sheet
921.200.82 1 1 total
p
MOUNTING PLATE
Min: 1,5mm
Max: 6,0mm
110
37
Depth in Console: 110mm
45
BRIDGE
E.C.R.
Mounting hole in Console: 22mm
Ver
Model
: K1K1734 U
Type
: 088.531.228
File
921\1OOO3sO1dwg
Drw. Date
MWJ 00.06.13
0*.
Date
MSS 0006.13
Ver.
Original: 921.100031
Change-Over Switch
Outline
Drw.
Date
Oik.
Dote
Dote: 00.06.13
Lyngsø Marine
921.100.03 1 Sheet
1
total
b
INTERFACE CABLE
PRINTING METHOD
9-NEEDLES DDT MATRIX
TEMPERATURE!
5'C-35T / 4 1 T - 9 5 T
HUMIDITYi
20X-807. (NDN-CDNDENSING)
PAPERTRANSPORT:
PUSH TRAKTOR
INTERFACES:
RS-422, SERIAL
CENTRONICS, PARALLEL
POWER SUPPLY!
EEO-240 VAC / 50 - 60 Hz
PRINTER INTERFACE
UBE-D 1846
35x77x57mm 9 POL
PDVER CONSUMPTION 38 W IN SELF TEST
16 W STAND-BY
WEIGHT!
APP. 3,3 kg
DIMENSIONS!
400xI10x330nrt (WxHxD)
PAPER TYPD
FANHOLD PAPER FDR TRACTDR FEEDER
SPARE PART NO. 970401,449
INK RIBBON*
RIBBON CARTRIDGE, BLACK
SPARE PART NO. 970.401.448
INTERFACE CABLE"
RS422 /SUB D9 3 neter
SPARE PART NO. 970.401.442
RS422 /SUB D9 5 neter
SPARE PART NO, 970.401.443
PRINTER INTERFACE!
SUBD9 PLUG TO TERHINALRAIL
SPARE PART NO. 970.401.441
LM ND. 970.401.440
Ver
FJe
962O132O1s1DWG
962013202s! DWG
962O132O3S1DWG
Drw
Date
Chk.
Dote
Ver
OMJ 000512
HAK 000921
CSN 000921
Original
DMS/UMS/UCS 2100
Printer - Seiko PS2400 / DRU2500
Outline
I
2
I
3
i
Re
Drw
Dote
Chk.
Date
Date-
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.20 3
Sheet
3
S
total
2
3
DIP SWITCH SETTING
UMS/UCS 2100 Alarm/Event Log Printer
SWITCH
DIP SV1TCH 1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1- 4
1-5
X
X
XX
X
X
OFF
x
x
1- 6
1-7
1-8
DIP SWITCH 2
DN
x
X
xX
x
x,x
INTERNATIONAL
CHARACTER
SEE TABLE 2
EMULATION MODE
CHARACTER SET
(IN IBM MODE)
CHARACTER TABLE
(IN EPSDN MODE)
PAGE LENGTH
LF CODE SELECTION
(IN IBM MODE)
DC1/DC3 CODE SELECTION
(IN EPSON MDDE)
CR CODE SELECTION
(IN IBM MDDE)
CR CODE SELECTION
(IN EPSDN MDDE)
EPSDN
SET 1
IBM
SET 2
ITALIC
GRAPHIC
11'
12'
LF = LF ONLY
LF = LF + CR
VALID
INVALID
CR = CR ONLY
CR = CR + LF
AUTD FEED
CR = CR + LF
2-1
2-2
SERIAL I / F
TRANSFER RATES
SEE TABLE 3
2
2
2
2
2
2
SERIAL PROTOCOL
PARITY BIT USED
PARITY BIT MDÜE
DATA LENGTH
I/F H O E
CSF MDDE
READY/BUSY
ND PARITY
DDD PARITY
8 BITS
PARALLEL
INVALID
-3
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
ON
X-ON/X-OFF
VITH PARITY
EVEN PARITY
7 BITS
SERIAL
VALID
Note! In case of an old software version there night be mistakes in printing text strings,
In this case switch 3 Must be set to DN to eliminate the mistake.
TABLE 2
SWITCH
U.SA
FRANCE
GERMANY
ENGLAND
DENMARK
SWEDEN
ITALY
SPAIN
Ver
FSe
962O132O1S3DWG
%2O132O2s3DWG
TABLE 3
INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER
Drw
Ottl
1-1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
DN
1-2
OFF
OFF
ON
DN
OFF
OFF
DN
1-3
SWITCH
9600 BPS
4800 BPS
2400 BPS
300 BPS
IFF
DN
OFF
DN
I - I
DN
OFF
DN
OFF
ON
DN
DFF
DFF
DN
IFF
ON
Date
Chk.
Dote
Ver
Re
Drw
Dote
Chk.
Date
000512
HAK 000921
Date
DMS/UMS/UCS 2100
Printer - Seiko SP2400 / DRU2500
DIP Switch Settings for Alarm/Event Log
I
Z-\
OFF
OngmL
1
SERIAL TRANSFER RATES
2
!
3
I
i
Lyngsø Marine
962.013.20 2
I
5
I
Sheet 3
3 total
6
CO
STORK-KUJAIMT
Stork - Kwant B.V.
DESCRIPTION AND INSTRUCTION
Telegraph System
Type 'Pointer'
Factory No. 341.749
System / Installation
Name
:
:
Telegraph system
Type 'Pointer'
Factory no.
:
341.749
Date
:
January 25, 2005
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P O Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND
No.: 341.749.pointer
Page 1/8
STORM-KUJAIMT
Stork - Kwant B.V.
CONTENTS
Page
1.
2.
3.
GENERAL
1.1
Principles
1.2
Operation
3
4
START UP PROCEDURE
2.1
Installation
2.2
Starting operation
4
4
TROUBLE SHOOTING
3.1
Blown fuse
3.2
Pointer movement errors
3.3
Alarm failure
5
5
5
4.
MAINTENANCE
5.
REPEAT ORDERS
6.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
APPENDIX: DRAWINGS
4A0098152-A
4A0098153-A
4A0098154-A
Principle diagram 1
Principle diagram 2
Principle diagram 3
4A0105016-B
4A0104916-A
3A0104926-C
4A0102077-A
4A0100123-A
Control unit Buk-B with inc. tel. syst. and motor unit el. Shaft
Control unit type Buk-B
Dial Buk-B
Relay box 400x300x120mm
Buzzer 482.052.55
4A0108473
4A0108474
3A0108476
4A0111605
Wiring diagram control unit wheelhouse
Wiring diagram control unit engine control room
Wiring diagram relay box telegraph system
Cable diagram telegraph installation pointer type
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND
No.: 341.749.pointer
Page 2/8
STORK-KUJANT
_
,
Stork - Kwant B.V.
1. GENERAL
1.1
Principles
The pointer telegraph is a communication system designed for sending orders from the
bridge or bridge annexes to the engine room or engine control room. Whenever a new
command is being issued, the telegraph alarm will be switched on. In order to mute the
alarm, the command must be acknowledged at the selected position by moving the
control lever to the position requested.
Precision potentiometers are used to transmit the orders. They are controlled by means
of an operating lever equipped with either a knob or a cross lever.
Servomotors are used for moving the pointers along the scales of the control units.
The system can be switched from telegraph mode to Remote Control (RC) mode by
means of a single contact. In RC mode, the telegraph alarm section is disabled. The
wheelhouse unit's reply pointer is now connected to it's own command lever. The RC
mode is used for controlling the Main Engine directly from the wheelhouse by means of
optional RC transmitters. Other possible options are:
Acoustic alarm: bells, buzzers, horns;
Electrical shaft systems;
Pneumatic valves;
Code switches;
Wrong way contacts;
Special potentiometers (e.g. for RC or order recorder);
Signal transmitters (e.g. 4-20mA).
Figure 1 (4A0098152) shows the basic principle of the pointer telegraph system.
Both transmitter potentiometers are connected to the amplifier inputs A and B, and to
the receiver motor units of the other position. With both command levers in the same
position, there will be no voltage at output C and the alarm will be off. When either
command lever is moved, output C will be driven high and the alarm will sound. The
amplifier's deadband is adjustable by means of a trimpotentiometer. However, the
factory setting should be adequate.
In figure 2 (4A0098153) the basic diagram has been extended with an extra operating
position and RC selection. Relay K2 selects which position is on service, relay K1
selects either RC or telegraph mode.
Figure 3 (4A0098154) shows how the receiver motor units of E.C.R. and E.R. are driven
by the wheelhouse transmitter potentiometer.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.pointer
Page 3/8
S T O R M -KUJASUT
_x
,
Stork - Kwant B.V.
1.2
Operation
A new command is issued by simply moving the command lever of the wheelhouse (or
annexe) to the desired position. The telegraph alarm will sound. At the selected operating
position the command must be acknowledged by moving the command lever to the
position indicated by the reply pointer, which will mute the alarm. The reply pointer in the
wheelhouse will indicate the position of the command lever in E.C.R. or E.R.
Position selection and switching to RC mode (if required) is done by means of single
contact as shown in figure 2 (4A0098153).
2. START UP PROCEDURE
2.1
Installation
•
•
•
The wiring of all units should be undamaged during mechanical installation.
Make sure all operating levers can move freely over their full range.
All instruments must be connected according to the relevant wiring diagram.
•
•
•
Measure the power supply voltage. It must correspond to the system design.
Connect the power supply to the system. Make sure the polarity is correct!
Check whether the installation's fuse corresponds to the maximum current consumed.
2.2
Starting operation
When the installation has been completed, the telegraph system can be put into operation.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.pointer
Page 4/8
STORK-KIJJASUT
Stork - Kwant B.V.
3. TROUBLE SHOOTING
3.1
Blown fuse
1.
2.
3.2
Pointer movement errors
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
wiring connection wrong or short circuit
fuse rating wrong
pointer moves in wrong direction:
transmitter potentiometer terminals 4 and 5 have been swapped.
pointer stuck at scale end:
wiper wire has been swapped with one of the others, this may cause the
potentiometer to blow!
pointer vibrates:
one or more terminals 3,4,5 or 6 not connected.
pointer does not move at all:
defective motor unit due to excessive voltage.
Alarm failure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Power not connected
Defective relay K3 on alarm PCB 98033
Bell clapper stuck to housing or defective bell.
Continuous alarm in full ahead or full astern position: end stops not adjusted
properly.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.pointer
Page 5/8
STORK-KUJAIUT
_.
.
Stork - Kwant B.V.
4. MAINTENANCE
Most components are accessible through the bottom side of the control unit, except for the
dial illumination parts, which can be accessed after removing the protective cover from the
top side of the unit. Always make sure that the power is switched off before dismantling
any system part.
4.1
Replacement of motor unit
When a receiver motor unit has been replaced, it should be adjusted as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
4.2
Loosen the screws that secure the sprocket to the shaft;
Set all command levers to the zero position;
Switch on the power supply;
Set the pointer to the zero position and fasten the sprocket screws tightly.
Replacement of potentiometer
When a transmitter potentiometer has been replaced, it should be adjusted as follows:
1. Set the command lever to the zero position;
2. Measure the potentiometer's wiper voltage, while rotating the potentiometer
shaft until half the power supply voltage is measured;
3. Fasten the sprocket to the shaft and check whether the corresponding receiver
pointer also indicates the zero position.
The pointer telegraph system does not require any regular maintenance.
5. REPEAT ORDERS
Always use the relevant wiring diagram and part number of the component. For parts
numbered in the diagram, please indicate that number and the specification as shown on
the concerning part.
Mention the STORK-KWANT factory number as written on the front page of this manual in
all correspondence.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.pointer
Page 6/8
S T O R K -MUJABMT
Stork - Kwant B.V.
6. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Wiring Diagram
4A0108473
4A0108474
3A0108476
4A0111605
DESCRIPTION
STORK-KWANT PART NR.
1.
Telegraph receiver motor RSM4 CP L
21000192
2.
Mini electronic dimmer MED-MM
28010101
3.
P.C.B., illumination Buk-B (LED)
51001427
4.
P.C.B., pointer telegraph alarm
51001247
5.
P.C.B., 3-sec. RC alarm
51000387
6.
Transmitter potentiometer telegraph
54000009
7.
Transmitter potentiometer RC
54000009
8.
Micro switch V-3514A
54100011
9.
Buzzer 18x24mm
56148100
10.
Lamp holder 18x24mm
56150403
11.
Lens 18x24mm, transparent 'PS/SB ON SERVICE1
56159037
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND
No.: 341.749.pointer
Page 7/8
STORK-HUJASVIT
Stork - Kwant B.V.
STORK-KWANT PART NR.
DESCRIPTION
12.
Illuminated push button 18x24mm
56151213
13.
Lens 18x24mm, blue TAKE OVER/ON SERVICE1
56159036
14.
Lamp pushbutton and lampholder
56300003
15.
Protective cover Buk-B
30200004
16.
Min-E-pitch chain repair set
25000030
17.
Buzzer type 482.052.55
54410003
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.pointer
Page 8/8
FIGURE 1
PROJ METHODE
PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM
POINTER TELEGRAPH SYSTEM
STORK-KUJANT
STORK
KWANT BV SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
4A0098152
WIJZ
GET NJV
SCHAAL
DD
BLAD
17 06-87 GEZ
CHAR
PART
CHANGE
CONVERTED TO CAD
NAME
01-11-99
PH
LEVER
TRANSMITTER
POINTER
REPLY
POINTER
DO
o
12
r \
/ RECEIVER \
(MOTOR UNIT!
RSM 4
BUZZER
^ TRANSMITTER
POTENTIOMETER
TELEGRAPH
OR
REMOTE CONTROL
BRIDGE
-O
ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
OR
ENGINE ROOM
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 98033
k
REPLY
POINTER
TRANSMITTER
POINTER
LEVER
o
REPLY
POINTER
LEVER
TRANSMITTER
POINTER
o
\
/RECEIVER
(MOTOR UNIT!
/RECEIVER
(MOTOR UNIT!
RSM 4 J
RSM 4 j
^—^
TRANSMITTER
POTENTIOMETER
ENGINE CONTROL ROOM (ECR)
J
-^ TRANSMITTER
POTENTIOMETER
GONG
BELL
ENGINE ROOM (ER)
FIGURE 2
PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM
POINTER TELEGRAPH INSTALLATION
STDRK-KUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
PROJ METHODE
4A0098153
WIJZ
GET NJV
SCHAAL
A
DO
BLAD
17-06-87 GEZ
CHAR
PART
A
CHANGE
CONVERTED TO CAD
DD
NAME
01-11-99
PH
1
RECEIVER
MOTOR UNITS
RSM 4
TRANSMITTER
POTENTIOMETER
BRIDGE LEVER
FIGURE 3
PROJ METHODE
PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM TELEGRAPH INDICATION
POINTER TELEGRAPH SYSTEM
STDRK-KUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
WIJZ
GET NJV
SCHAAL
DD
BLAD
17-06-87 GEZ
LET
ST.NR
WIJZIGINQ
DIMMER VERWIJDERD
m
NAAM
13-7-01
EVD
138
25
144
D.D.
m
PANEL
CUT-OUT
•Jiï ]
• STOP •
~DQ*O
(VI
CO
(NI
~
RS3
\ \ \ \ \
/
\ SIGNALLAMP "SB. ON SERVICE"
i ILL. PUSHBUTTON "TAKE OVER / ON SERVICE"
, DIMMER DIAL ILLUMINATION AND LAMPS "ON SERVICE"
, BUZZER TELEGRAPH ALARM
SIGNALLAMP "P.S. ON SERVICE"
TRANSMITTER POINTER
PROJ. METHODE
CONTROL UNIT WITH INCORPORATED TELEGRAPH
SYSTEM AND MOTOR UNIT ELECTRICAL SHAFT
STORK-KÎUJANT
STORK - KWANT B.V. SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
UA0105016
WIJZ
GET. EVO
SCHAAL:
B
D.D.
BLAD.
GEZ.
25
144
•J
AO
OW
m
m S OP
•
138
PANEL
CUT-OUT
oo
rsi
RS3
/
BUZZER
TRANSMITTER POINTER
REPLY POINTER
o
VO
al
1 FULL •Tfl
a
_JJ"f i
i
"
!
1
:1t.
a
A
PROJ. METHODE
CONTROL UNIT WITH INCORPORATED TELEGRAPH
SYSTEM
STDRK-KillJANT
STORK - KWANT B V. SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
4 A010A-916
WIJZ.
GET. EVD
SCHAAL:
D.D.
BLAD.
GEZ
MAATVOERINfl TOFOFVOFRD
HS
OMGF7FT NAAR 3D
120° VERDELEN IN 20 GELIJKE STUKKEN
MATERIAAL PERSPEX NATUREL DIK 2 MM
BACKGROUND BLACK
VLG. TEK. T.B.V. 2IJKANT LINKS.
4A0094563
AHEAD- EN ASTERN SECTOR
VAN PLAATS VERWISSELD.
4A0094562
B
MATERIAAL PERSPEX NATUREL DIK 1 MM
BACKGROUND BLACK
B
TEKST EN CIJFERS ARIAL
CIJFERS 5 MM, DOORLICHTEND WIT EN ROOD.
COMMANDO'S 4 MM, DOORLICHTEND WIT EN ROOD.
FIRMANAAM 2,5 MM, NIET DOORLICHTEND WIT.
ACHTERGROND MAT ZWART.
ACHTERZIJDE DOORLICHTEND WIT AFDEKKEN.
VOORZIJDE MATTEREN.
VORM- EN PLAATSTOLERANTIES
VOLGENS NEN-EN-ISO 1101
RUWHEIDVOLGENS MAATTOLERANTIES
MATERIAAL r - . . . , . A
NEN-ISO4287
VOLGENS NEN-ISO 406
rMMA
SCHAALPLAAT BUK-B 11-COMM.
STORK-KWANT
STORK-KWANTBV SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
Form
A3
Wl|Z
3A0104926
C
Art 60300021
Datum 4-9-1997
Blad 1 / 1
r
LET
STNR
WIJZIGING
OMGEZET NAAR CAD
m
DD
NAAM
i-2-98
EVD
CV1
8.7
360
400
COLOUR RAL7030
TYPE KL1536 RITTAL
BOX
PROJ METHODE
400x300x120
STDRK-KUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
4 A0102077
WIJZ
GET EVD
SCHAAL
DD
BLAD
28-1-98
GEZ
LET
STNR
A
WIJZIGING
OMGEZET NAARCAD
DO
NAAM
06-03-96
EVD
070
Geeignet für trockene und
feuchte Räume, so wie für Aussenmontage. Ausführung noch
VDE-Vorschrift 0804/2.80.
Suitable for dry and damp
areas as well as for outdoor
use. Model fullfils VDE r e quirements 0804/2.80.
Technische Daten :
Technical specifications :
Gehäuse : Thermoplast (ABS)
schlagfest, grau.
Anschluss : Schraubanschluss,
Kabeleinführung bis
9 mm.
Temperaturbereich : —10 bis +80'C
Tonfrequenz : ca. 600Hz.
Lautstärke : 98 dB( A), gemessen
in 1m Abstand.
Schutzart : IP 43 nach DIN 40050.
Montage : Schallaustrittsöffnung
nach unten.
Gewicht : 160 Gr.
Nennspannung : 24 V=.
Nennstrom : 100 mA.
Housing : Thermoplastic (ABS)
high impact, grey.
Terminal : screw, suitable for
wiring up to 9 mm.
Temperature range : - 1 0 to +80*C.
Audio frequency : approx. 600 Hz.
Sound output : approx. 98 dB (A)
measured at a distance of 1 m.
Type of enclosure : IP 43 as per
DIN 40050
Mounting : sound outlet facing
downwards.
Weight : 160 g.
Voltage : 24 V.DC.
Rated current : 100 mA.
BUZZER TYPE 482.052.55
STDRKi-KillJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
UA010O123
PROJ METHODE
wuz
GET E V D
SCHAAL
0D
BLAD
GEZ
r
LET
STNR
DD
WIJZIGING
NAAM
CONTROL UNIT WHEELHOUSE
TELEGRAPH RECEIVER RSM4
1
2
5
EL SHAFT SYSTEM
3
TELEGRAPH
TRANSMITTER
RC TRANSMITTER
5
33
36
y
TAS
PORT WING
ON SERVICE
STBD WING
ON SERVICE
51
71
I
"_
TELEGRAPH
ALARM
13
I
I AH
13
r
PCB 105369-1
6;
1M
I
MED MM
ON
SERV
H
DIAL ILLUMINATION
„ +
2
24VDC 1W
1—
11
OVER
-je
STOP
ms 107
16
TAKE
34
4
r"
105
L
L.
16
»AS
ri
~
I
12
MED MM
13
14
15
16
17
PCB 101360
18
19
20
POS
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
13 33 34 35 36
51 60
SERV
71 105 106 107
; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; i ; i ; 77
TO TERMINAL BLOCK 'MAIN TELEGRAPH'
WHEELHOUSE CONSOLE
/
21 22 23
24
25
26 27 28 29 30
k k k k
TO CONTROL BOX EL SHAFT SYSTEM
15x1,5
/ 10x1.5
PROJ METHODE
4A0108A-73
WIRING DIAGRAM CONTROL UNIT WHEELHOUSE
STORKi-KUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WOROT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
wuz
GET
JR
SCHAAL
DD
BLAD
23-01-01
GEZ
LET
I ST NR
WIJZIGINQ
DD
NAAM
t
CONTROL UNIT ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
TELEGRAPH RECEIVER RSMt
1
2
5
6
k
TELEGRAPH
TRANSMITTER
ORDER
RECORDER
33
IAH
36-H
h-j-35
Us
TELEGRAPH
ALARM
AHEAD
151 152
ASTERN
^SU 155
150
153
60
1
2
4|5
6
7
13 33 3^
35 36 60 150 151 152 153 15*. 155
TT;
TO TERMINAL BLOCK 'MAIN TELEGRAPH1
ECR CONSOLE
/
18x1.5
PROJ METHODE
WIRING DIAGRAM CONTROL UNIT ENGINE CONTROL ROOM
STDRK-KiUiANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUOEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
WIJZ
GET JR
SCHAAL _
DD
BLAD
23-01-01 GEZ
LET
DD
I ST NR I WIJZIGING "
NAAM
RELAY BOX TELEGRAPH SYSTEM
PCB 98033-5
5
7—0
—i—° ir^3—
6
10
9
r>
'01
Kl
14
14
K
ECR/ER
U
59
TELEORAPH ALARM
TEL/RC
L^LJ—\
T>
K
130 131
56
10!
13!
3-SEC ALARM
POWER FAILURE
POINTER PARKING
IMEBMETICALLY SEALED]
PCB 101727-2
11
2 | 3 | t"
1
2
5
6
1
8 | 9 | 10 | 12 | 13 | 1t | 17 | IB | 19 | 20
54
55 | 56 | 57 | 58 | 59 tOi|i02J
54
55 56 5 1 58 59
4 5
9
[ÏÏÔ 13i|i3Z
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | S | 6 I 7 [ 8 | 9 [TO | 11 ] 12
I»|)3t|l35|i36|i37|i3a|i39
6
14
9
5
4
I 1 [ 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 9 | 13 | 14 154 | 55 [ 56 | 57 [ 5B [ 59 [ 60 [
TO TERMINAL BLOCK WHEELHOUSE CONSOLE
/14«1S
PROJ METHODE
WIRING DIAGRAM RELAY BOX TELEGRAPH SYSTEM
3A0108<V76
STORK-KUJANT
STORK
KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECH1 WOROT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG OE WET
iET
JR
OD
23-01-01 GE2 ,
r
~i
LET.
15x1.5
TO CONTROL UNIT WHEELHOUSE
TO TERMINAL BLOCK PORT WING CONSOLÉ
/
TO TERMINAL BLOCK STBD WING CONSOLE
/ 4x1,5
ST.NR.
WIJZIQING
TO CONTROL UNIT E.C.R,
/
DD.
NAAM
18x1,5
TO RELAY BOX TELEGRAPH SYSTEM
TERMINAL BLOCK
'MAIN TELEGRAPH'
E.C.R.CONSOLE
TERMINAL BLOCK
'MAIN TELEGRAPH'
WHEELHOUSE CONSOLE
ENGINE ROOM
EMERGENCY STAND
TELEGRAPH ALARM
NOT STORK-KWANT SUPPLY
CABLE DIAGRAM TELEGRAPH INSTALLATION 'POINTER' TYPE
STORK-KiUJANT
STORK - KWANT B.V. SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
4A0111605
PROJ. METHODE
WIJZ.
GET. TTW
SCHAAL.
D.D.
BLAD.
11-08-03
GEZ.
STORK-KWAiïUT
o
.
.
..
.„
w
Stork - Kwant B.V.
DESCRIPTION AND INSTRUCTION
Telegraph System
Type 'Norm VR'
Factory No. 341.749
.
w
System / Installation
:
Telegraph system
Name
:
Type 'Norm VR'
Factory no.
:
341.749
Date
:
January 25,2005
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.norm
Page 1/7
STORK-HtUASUT
Stork - Kwant B.V.
CONTENTS
Page
1.
2.
3.
GENERAL
1.1
Principles
1.2
Operation
3
3
START UP PROCEDURE
2.1
Installation
2.2
Starting operation
4
4
TROUBLE SHOOTING
3.1
Blown fuse
3.2
Alarm failure
4
4
4.
MAINTENANCE
5.
REPEAT ORDERS
6.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
APPENDIX: DRAWINGS
4A0101114-A
4A0104619-C
4A0104055
Transmitter-receiver with lamp signalling
Receiver-transmitter WD
Gong 0150 type 211.621.13
4A0105208-A
4A0099293-B
4A0111607
Wiring diagram transmitter-receiver wheelhouse
Wiring diagram receiver-transmitter engine room
Cable diagram telegraph installation 'Norm' type
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.norm
Page 2/7
Stork - Kwant B.V.
1. GENERAL
1.1
Principles
The norm telegraph system is a communication system designed to transmit engine
commands between telegraph units on different locations on the ship.
The bridge unit acts as transmitter-receiver. The other units act as receiver-transmitter
or as receiver only.
Whenever a new command from the bridge unit is being issued, the telegraph alarms
on all locations will be switched on.
Confirmation of the command by a receiver-transmitter unit will mute the alarms.
The engine settings should be changed according to the new command.
Possible options are:
Visible alarm: flash lights
Extra acoustic alarm: bells, buzzers, horns
Order recorder contacts.
1.2
Operation
A new command from the bridge unit is issued by rotating the command knob to the
desired position. The alarm is now activated (on all operating positions).
On all units, the signal lamp indicating the new command will flash, while the lamp
indicating the previous command remains being lit continuously.
The receiver-transmitter 'on service' must now confirm the new command by rotating the
command knob to the position indicated by the flashing signal lamp. The alarm will be
muted. The signal lamp indicating the new command will now be lit continuously, the
signal lamp indicating the previous command will be off.
If more than one receiver-transmitter is connected, a provision has been made to select
which one is 'on service'. This provision may consist of illuminated push buttons (one for
each operating position) or a selecting switch (one for the complete system).
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.norm
Page 3/7
Stork-KwantB.V.
STORK-KUIAHTT
2. START UP PROCEDURE
2.1
Installation
•
•
The wiring of all units should be undamaged during mechanical installation.
All instruments must be connected according to the relevant wiring diagram.
•
•
•
Measure the power supply voltage. It must correspond to the system design.
Connect the power supply to the system. Make sure the polarity is correct!
Check whether the installation's fuses correspond to the maximum current consumed.
2.2
Starting operation
When the installation has been completed, the telegraph system can be put into operation.
3. TROUBLE SHOOTING
3.1
Blown fuse
1.
2.
3.2
Wiring connection wrong or short circuit.
Fuse rating wrong.
Alarm failure
1.
2.
3.
Power not connected.
Bell clapper stuck to housing.
Defective bell, buzzer or flash light.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.norm
Page 4/7
Stork-KwantB.V.
4. MAINTENANCE
All signal lamps, lamps for dial illumination and knobs can be replaced from the outside.
Other components are accessible through the top side of the control unit. Always make
sure the power is switched off before dismantling any system part.
The norm telegraph system does not require any regular maintenance.
5. REPEAT ORDERS
Always use the relevant wiring diagram and part number of the component. For parts
numbered in the diagram, please indicate that number and the specification as shown on
the concerning part.
Mention the STORK-KWANT factory number as written on the front page of this manual in
all correspondence.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.norm
Page 5/7
S T O R HS=KU! ABUT
Stork - Kwant B.V.
6. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Wiring Diagram No.
4A0105208-A
4A0099293-B
4A0111607
DESCRIPTION
STORK-KWANT PART NR.
1.
Diode
2.
P.C.B., telegraph alarm
WH
51000307
3.
Dimmer dial illumination
WH
54020003
4.
Rotary transmitter switch
WH + ER
54111009
5.
Switch deck
WH + ER
54112011
6.
Resistor 249E
50102490
7.
Resistor 47E5
50104759
8.
Knob for dimmer
9.
Knob for transmitter switch WH + ER
54150017
10.
Buzzer telegraph alarm
54410007
11.
Gong 0150
12.
Fuse holder
13.
Lamp holder
56210001
14.
Lamp hood, green,
red,
white,
red (filter)
56210011
56210012
56210013
56210019
15.
Lamp
56300001
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
50400020
WH
WH
54150016
54420001
WH
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
55110001
No.: 341.749.norm
Page 6/7
Stork - Kwant B.V.
DESCRIPTION
STORK-KWANT PART NR.
16.
Relay
WH
-
55000002
17.
Relay socket
WH
-
55000003
18.
Relay clip (pair)
WH
-
55000004
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341.749.norm
Page 7/7
r
LET
ST.NR.
WIJZIGING
OMGEZET NAAR CAD
NORM 1922
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
NORM 1 U 2
192
182
77
8
97
20
186
D.D.
NAAM
05-03-97
EVD
NORM 1 U 2
INCREASED DEPTH
144
135
90
8
120
20
139
144
135
105
8
135
20
139
TRANSMITTER KNOB
DIAL ILLUMINATION
TERMINAL BLOCK
PROJ. METHODE
TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER WITH LAMP SIGNALLING
STORKi-KiUIANT
L
STORK - KWANT B.V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
A-AO1O1114
WIJZ
GET. E V D
SCHAAU
D.D.
BLAD
GEZ.
r
A
| WARTELPOSITIES GESPIEGELD
B
AHEAD LINKS
C
KASTDIEPTE 105 - - > 120
28-01-99
PH
15-02-00
HS
07-03--03
HS
DIAL 150
35
120
CABLE INLET PG11 FOR CABLE DIAMETER 11.
CABLE INLET PG29 FOR CABLE DIAMETER 26.
PROJ METHODE
SKETCH RECEIVER - TRANSMITTER
STDRK-KÏUIANT
L
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
4 A010A-619
WIJZ.
c
GET. EVD
SCHAAL- - | : 2 5
DD
BLAD.
GEZ.
r
Pg.11 f o r cable diam. 8-12 mm.
130
_j
.i—i:
Type AW2
Make
Funke & Huster
Signatpower
appr. 100 dB(A)
Operating voltage
24 V.DC
Power consumption
10 VA.
IP55 (according to DIN 40050 / IEC 529)
Housing of lightweight metal painted lightgrey (RAL 7032)
Weight 1.45 kg
SKETCH GONG 0150 TYPE 211.621.13
STORK-KÏUJANT
L
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
4 A0104055
PROJ. METHODE
WIJZ
GET EVD
SCHAAL:
DD.
BLAD.
23-10-96 GEZ.
CONVERTED TO CAD
07-10-04
JR
TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER WHEELHOUSE
ORDER RECORDER
249E |8x)
FULL
AHEAD
FULL
ASTERN
1=FULL AHEAD
15
30
DIAL
FUSE
ILLUMINATION
13
15
POT FREE CONTACT
CONTINUOUS
ALARM
PCB 101070
ALARM TIMER
2 [ 3 [ 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 [ 9 | 10
13
L / ^ l BUZZER
~1
\ J
12
13 14 15 20
1
TELEGRAPH
ALARM
r
z
14
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
54 55
CX
5
O
POWER
FAILURE
9|
56
12 13 14 15 20 22 30 32 54 55
TO TERMINAL BLOCK 'EMERGENCY TELEGRAPH'
WHEELHOUSE CONSOLE
, 18x1,5
4A0105208
TELEGRAPH TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER WHEELHOUSE
STDRK-KUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
PROJ METHODE
WIJZ
GET TTW
SCHAAL
DD
BLAD
12-12-97 GEZ
CONVERTED TO CAD
17-12-97
TTW
T
RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER ENGINE ROOM
WRONG WAY CONTACTS
AH
1=FULL AHEAD
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
14
7
8
9
93
12
13
14
93
96
94 96
f
PROJ METHODE
4A0099293
WIRING DIAGRAM RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER ENGINE ROOM
STDRKi-KillJANT
STORK - « W A N T B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
WIJZ
GET MZ
SCHAAL
B
DP
BLAD
10-10-89 GEZ
•e
r
~i
TO TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER WHEELHOUSE /
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18x1,5
TERMINAL BLOCK
22 30 32 54 55 56 -'EMERGENCY TELEGRAPH'
WHEELHOUSE CONSOLE
9 12 13
/ 3x1,5
SUPPLY 24VDC (13=*1
UNINTERRUPTED
POWER SUPPLY
/ 2x1,5 /
/
POTENTIAL FREE
CONTACT
'POWER FAILURE'
\
56 = COMMON
54 = PWR OFF
55 = PWR ON
DMS2100I
CONTROL CABINET
DMS1AI01
/ 3x1,5
32
/
2 X3
IL
3 X3
30
1 X3
SIGNAL TO ORDER RECORDER
12x1,5
RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER ENGINE ROOM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 12 13 14 93 94 96
DMS2100I
CONTROL CABINET
13 X18
/
TB
12 X5
10 X5
A1010
TELEGRAPH
ALARM
NOT STORK-KWANT SUPPLY
CABLE DIAGRAM TELEGRAPH INSTALLATION 'NORM' TYPE
STORKi-KïlDANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOOR6EH0UDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
4A0111607
PROJ METHODE
WIJZ
GET TTW
SCHAAL
DD
BLAD
11-08-03
GEZ
STORK-S^låJANT
Stork - Kwant B.V.
DESCRIPTION AND INSTRUCTION
Electrical Shaft System
Type 3
Factory No. 341.749
System / Installation
Name
:
:
Electrical Shaft System
Type 3
Factory no.
:
341.749
Date
:
January 25, 2005
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341749.elas
Page 1/7
STQRK-KUSASUT
^x
,
Stork - Kwant B.V.
CONTENTS
Page
1.
GENERAL
1.1
Principles
1.2
Operation
3
3
START UP PROCEDURE
2.1
Installation
2.2
Starting operation
4
4
TROUBLE SHOOTING
3.1
System status
3.2
Potentiometer failure
3.3
Line up failure
5
5
5
4.
MAINTENANCE
6
5.
REPEAT ORDERS
6
6.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
7
2.
3.
APPENDIX: DRAWINGS
4A0105016-B
3A0104926-B
4A0106390
4A0106392
4A0105217
4A0101576-A
Control unit Buk-B with inc. tel. syst. and motor unit el. shaft
Dial Buk-B
Control unit type Buk-C-Ext stbd wing
Control unit type Buk-C-Ext port wing
DialBuk-C
Box 275x220x120mm
4A0108473
4A0110082-C
4A0110083-A
4A0111606
Wiring
Wiring
Wiring
Wiring
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
diagram
diagram
diagram
diagram
control
control
control
control
Postal address:
P.O Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
unit
unit
unit
box
wheeihouse
port wing
stbd wing
el. shaft system
No.: 341749.elas
Page 2/7
Stork - Kwant B.V.
1. GENERAL
1.1
Principles
The electrical shaft system synchronises the operating levers of all control units (=
positions) connected. There is always just one position in control (= 'on service'). The
levers of all other control units will follow this position's lever movements.
This way the propulsion or manoeuvring system can be controlled from different locations.
Thus avoiding the necessity of installing, selecting and monitoring all kind of signal
transmitters, switches, etc. at all control positions.
The electrical shaft system synchronises all positions, as if they were mounted on a
mechanical shaft.
One of the main benefits of the electrical shaft system over a mechanical shaft is its
movement reliability. When the lever of a position, that is not 'on service', is blocked, the
system will give an alarm, but the remaining levers can still be moved.
The position 'on service' can not be influenced by the other positions.
Precision potentiometers are used to transmit the lever movements of the position 'on
service'. The levers of the other positions are synchronised by means of servo motors.
1.2
Operation
A position takes control over the system, when the 'take over' button on that position is
pushed, or when the corresponding contact is closed by means of the propulsion control
system.
While the position is 'on service', the lamp / button is illuminated and the corresponding 'on
service' contact is closed.
The system is provided with preferential switching. Initially, when the system is put into
operation, position #1 will always be 'on service'.
Also when two 'take over' buttons are pushed at the same time, position #1 will be 'on
service', until only one button is pushed.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341749.elas
Page 3/7
Stork - Kwant B.V.
2. START UP PROCEDURE
2.1
Installation
•
•
•
The wiring of all units should be undamaged during mechanical installation.
Make sure all operating levers can move freely over their full range.
All instruments must be connected according to the relevant wiring diagram.
•
•
Measure the power supply voltage. It must correspond to the system design.
Connect the power supply to the system. Make sure the polarity is correct!
2.2
Starting operation
When installation is completed, the electrical shaft system can be put into operation.
•
•
•
Remove both fuses.
Switch on the power.
Attention!
Insert both fuses, but if one or more potentiometer failure indicators are lit, remove
the fuses immediately and examine the external wiring carefully!
Refer to the wiring diagram of the control box for the status indicator overview.
Normally, only the green status indicators for
'WHEELHOUSE ON SERVICE'
and
'SYSTEM OK'
will be lit.
•
•
Check the taking over between the positions
Check the electrical shaft system for proper performance. It is now operational.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341749.elas
Page 4/7
S T O R K -KUJASUT
_x
,
Stork - Kwant B.V.
3. TROUBLE SHOOTING
3.1
System status
To show the current status of the electrical shaft system, the main P.C.B. 101250 inside
the control box is provided with status indicators.
Please refer to the wiring diagram of the control box in the drawing section.
3.2
Potentiometer failure
Each potentiometer is constantly being checked. If the wiper voltage is not within the
specified range, a potentiometer failure alarm is generated.
This alarm will disable all servo amplifiers, causing all servo motors to be stopped.
Action required:
3.3
Check the wiring of the affected position and the potentiometer itself.
Line up failure
The servo motor units of all positions will always keep trying to line up the levers with the
position 'on service'.
If a position is not lined up within the specified time, a line up failure alarm will be
generated.
Action required:
Check if the lever is not mechanically jammed in any way
Check the wiring of the affected position
The line up failure could be occurring in the stop position only. In this case, the friction
device or clutch of the servo motor unit may be adjusted too lightly.
If the line up failure occurs in the extreme positions of the levers, check if the wiper
voltages of the potentiometers are equal.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341749.e!as
Page 5/7
Stork - Kwant B.V.
4. MAINTENANCE
It is recommended to check whether the zero stop positions are identical for all operating
levers from time to time. When these positions are correct, examine the line up accuracy.
It should meet the imposed requirements.
Do not lubricate any mechanical part.
5. REPEAT ORDERS
Always use the relevant wiring diagram and part number of the component. For parts
numbered in the diagram, please indicate that number and the specification as shown on
the concerning part.
Mention the STORK-KWANT factory number as written on the front page of this manual in
all correspondence.
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel. +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address:
P.O.Box23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341749.elas
Page 6/7
STORK-HUJAIVIT
Stork - Kwant B.V.
6. ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Wiring Diagram No.
4A0108473
4A0110082-C
4A0110083-A
4A0111606
STORK-KWANT PART NR.
DESCRIPTION
1.
Protective cover Buk-B
30200004
2.
Protective cover Buk-C
30200016
3.
P.C.B., motor control Buk-B
51000347
4.
P.C.B., motor control Buk-C
51000337
5.
P.C.B., dial illumination Buk-B (LED)
51001427
6.
P.C.B., dial illumination Buk-C (LED)
51000977
7.
P.C.B., main board, electrical shaft system
51001167
8.
Transmitter-potentiometer el. shaft
54000009
9.
Electrical shaft motor Buk-B
54200011
10.
Electrical shaft motor Buk-C
54200280
11.
Illuminated push button 18x24mm
56151213
12.
Lens 18x24mm, blue
56159036
13.
Lamp illuminated push button
56300003
Stork-Kwant B.V.
Tel +31 (0)515 413745
Fax +31 (0)515 422478
Postal address.
P O Box 23,
SNEEK - HOLLAND.
No.: 341749.elas
Page 7/7
LET.
ST.NR.
WIJZIGING
DIMMER VERWIJDERO
144
c
OBAO
" SLOW
"
•
NAAM
13-7-01
EVD
138
25.
•STOP
D.O.
PANEL
CUT-OUT
oo
RS3
\ \ \ \ \
/
SIGNALLAMP " S B . ON SERVICE"
ILL. PUSHBUTTON "TAKE OVER / ON SERVICE"
DIMMER DIAL ILLUMINATION AND LAMPS "ON SERVICE"
BUZZER TELEGRAPH ALARM
SIGNALLAMP "P.S. ON SERVICE"
TRANSMITTER POINTER
REPLY POINTER
PROJ. METHODE
CONTROL UNIT WITH INCORPORATED TELEGRAPH
SYSTEM AND MOTOR UNIT ELECTRICAL SHAFT
STDRK-KiUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V. SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
A0105016
WIJZ.
GET. EVD
SCHAAL:
B
D.D.
BLAD.
GEZ.
DFTFNTS TOEGEVOEGD
MAATVOERING TOEGEVOEGD
OMGEZET NAAR 3D
120° VERDELEN IN 20 GELIJKE STUKKEN
-Ê»
MATERIAAL PERSPEX NATUREL DIK 2 MM
BACKGROUND BLACK
VLG. TEK. T.B.V. ZIJKANT LINKS.
4A0094563
AHEAD- EN ASTERN SECTOR
VAN PLAATS VERWISSELD.
4A0094562
TEKST EN CIJFERS ARIAL.
CIJFERS 5 MM, DOORLICHTEND WIT EN ROOD.
COMMANDO'S 4 MM, DOORLICHTEND WIT EN ROOD.
FIRMANAAM 2,5 MM, NIET DOORLICHTEND WIT.
ACHTERGROND MATZWART.
ACHTERZIJDE DOORLICHTEND WIT AFDEKKEN.
VOORZIJDE MATTEREN.
MATERIAAL PERSPEX NATUREL DIK 1 MM
BACKGROUND BLACK
RUWHEID VOLGENS
MAATTOLERANTIES
NEN-ISO4287
VOLGENS NEN-ISO 406
SCHAALPLAAT BUK-B 11-COMM.
44 ±0,2
67 5
' -0,5
VORM- EN PLAATSTOLERANTIES
VOLGENS NEN-EN-ISO 1101
PMMA Helder
STORK-KWANT
STORK-KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG OE WET
Form
A3
Wig
3A0104926
Art 60300021
Datum 4-9-1997
Blad 1 / 1
r
96
ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTON "TAKE OVER / ON SERVICE"
DIMMER DIAL ILLUMINATION AND SIGNAL LAMP "ON SERVICE"
ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTON "EMERGENCY STOP" WITH COVER
TERMINAL BLOCK
PROJ. METHODE
CONTROL UNIT TYPE BUK C EXT.
STORKÏ-KÏUJANT
L
STORK - KWANT B.V. SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
UA0106390
WIJZ.
GET PH
SCHAAL:
DD.
BLAD.
GEZ.
r
20
96
— /. —
—
2—
E" ° ~~
— /-» —
a
—
ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTON "EMERGENCY STOP" WITH COVER
DIMMER DIAL ILLUMINATION AND SIGNAL LAMP "ON SERVICE"
ILLUMINATED PUSHBUTTON "TAKE OVER / ON SERVICE"
PROJ METHODE
CONTROL UNIT TYPE BUK C EXT.
STDRKi-KiüJANT
L
STORK - KWANT B V 5NEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
4 A0106392
WIJZ
GET PH
SCHAAL: -|:2 5
DD
BLAD.
18-02-99 GEZ
1*1
IOMGEZET NAAR 3D
î
03-12-04
HS
24
15
12
™--10 MAX. 10—«|
O)
*
9—8
•
PI II 1
' 8—9
^B
I-
HALF
i
10,2
co
LU
LU
Q
OU
LU
>
r-i
- 9
-^-9
^ H •^"^^Cl
OL.V/VV
f\\K\
O
ÇO
DETENT
30'
i
_~ •^ H
•
m
co"
DETENT
18*
00
9r"2
DEAD- 2 J " 9
•*-"--•-SLOW- - - B
+v
•t-^^sjgi^ Ö:-J|!
piifc
n^u
-SÊ&
1
DU
LU
i
co
DETENT
8'
DETENT
0'
DETENT
6,8
CO
ir-
a:
1
ii
M.._
LU
5
DETENT
18"
in
oo"
»
••••••'.•
^
_ . B #
DETENT
30'
10,2
10
co"
CM
O
MB
en
•
11,
ff£Sr?
t
DETENT
44'
""IM
DETENT
44'
1
48:;
BACKGROUND BLACK.
NUMBERS, TEXT AND LINES TRANSLUCENT WHITE AND RED.
ACHTERGROND MAT ZWART.
CIJFERS, TEKST EN LIJNEN DOORLICHTEND WIT EN ROOD.
VOORZIJDE MATTEREN.
HET GEHEEL AAN DE ACHTERZIJDE DOORLiCHTEND WIT AFDEKKEN.
RUWHEID VOLGENS MAATTOLERANTIES
VOLGENS NEN-ISO 406
N EN-ISO 4287
MATERIAAL :
VORM- EN PLAATSTOLERANTIES
VOLGENS NEN-EN-ISO 1101
PMMA Helder
SCHAALPLAAT BUK-C 11-COMM.
STORK-KWANT
STORK-KWANT B.V. SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
Form.
A4
4A0105217
,A
Wijz.
Art.:60400038
Get: EVD
Datum: 5-1-1998
Schaal: 1 :
Vrijgave dd:
Blad: 1 / 1
LET.
STNR
A
WIJZIGING
OMGEZETNAARCAD
DD
NAAM
14-02-96
EVD
6.5
226
275
COLOUR RAL7032
TYPE HLN1215
RSV2
BOX
PROJ. METHODE
275x220x120mm
STDRKi-KiUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
UA0101576
WIJZ
GET. EVD
SCHAAL:
DD
BLAD.
14-02-96 GEZ.
LET
STNR
DD
WIJZIGING
NAAM
CONTROL UNIT WHEELHOUSE
TELEGRAPH RECEIVER RSM4
1
2
5
3
EL. SHAFT_SYSTEM
TELEGRAPH
TRANSMITTER
4
PORT WING
ON SERVICE
RC TRANSMITTER
STBD WING
ON SERVICE
51
33
71
16
TAKE
|
! OVER
Mr"
TELEGRAPH
ALARM
13
STOP
106 107
,~1
i
"1
ON
SERV
| AH
13
16
DIAL ILLUMINATION
f'
|
AS
AS
24VDCJW
11
IAS
F
PCS 105369-1
1M
L.
i
MED MM
105
71
L.—.J
14
MED MM
15 16
17
PCB 101360
18
POS
19
20
<n
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
SERV
33 34 35 36 51 60 71 105 106 107
) i;
TO TERMINAL SLOCK 'MAIN TELEGRAPH'
WHEELHOUSE CONSOLE
/
\)))
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
15x1,5
TO CONTROL BOX EL SHAFT SYSTEM
/
10x1.5
PROJ METHODE
4A0108473
WIRING DIAGRAM CONTROL UNIT WHEELHOUSE
STORK-KUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT V00R8EH0UDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
WIJ2
GET JR
SCHAAL
DD
BLAD
23-01-01 GEZ
LET
DD
NAAM
A
STNR
ESS101 -> ESS104
WIJZIGING
07-05-02
JR
B
TERMINAL NUMBERS EMERGENCY STOP
19-06-02
JR
C
EMERGENCY PUSH-BUTTON -> SWITCH
27-11-03
JR
CONTROL UNIT PORT WING
EL SHAFT SYSTEM
ILL PUSHBUTTON
EMERGENCY STOP
TAKE
16
,
V
ON
180 182 184 185
0VE
'
1
Lib
6 J
MED MM
-
=%=
T
-S1003
13
L_
181 183
CONTACT RATING 2A/24VDC
I AH
I AS
DIAL ILLUMINATION
PCB 105315-2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PCB 101340
MED MM
POS
ON
SERV
L
J
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
1
2
51 180 181 182 183 184 185
5 i—i
18x1,5
\J1
Kl
6i A
14
TERMINAL BLOCK
PORT WING CONSOLE
1
2
1
12 13 60 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 51 180 181 182 183 184 185
k
/ 2x1,5
PART OF ESS104
/ 6x1,5
TELEGRAPH
+ RC-ALARM
TO TERMINAL BLOCK 'MAIN TELEGRAPH'
WHEELHOUSE CONSOLE
TO CONTROL BOX
EL SHAFT SYSTEM
/ 4x1,5
y 9x1,5
NOT STORK-KWANT SUPPLY
PROJ METHODE
WIRING DIAGRAM CONTROL UNIT PORT WING
STDRK-KiUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
K A0110082
WIJZ
GET JR
SCHAAL
c
DD
BLAD
2 5 - 0 4 - 0 2 GEZ *$
LET
WIJZIGING
STNR
EMERGENCY PUSH-BUTTON -> SWITCH
DO
NAAM
27-11-03
JR
CONTROL UNIT STBD WING
EL SHAFT SYSTEM
ILL PUSHBUTTON
EMERGENCY STOP
16
TAKE ,
V ON V
1i
OVER
I
J
I SERV
<8>
180 182 184 185
^| JA
I MED_MM
H !=%=
S1004
ÎÎLJ
13
L_
181 183
CONTACT RATING 2A/24VDC
I AH
(AS
DIAL ILLUMINATION
IL
24VDC 1W
l~~
PCB 105315-2
71
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
PCB 101340
MED MM
POS
ON
SERV
L
1
2
71 180 181 182 183 184 185
V«T
18x1.5
TERMINAL BLOCK
STBD WING CONSOLE
J
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
VJ1 K1 iv 6
TT
1
2
12 13 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 71 180 181 182 183 184 185
k kk k
/ 2x1,5
/
PART OF ESS101
/
6x1,5
TELEGRAPH
+ RC-ALARM
TO TERMINAL BLOCK 'MAIN TELEGRAPH'
WHEELHOUSE CONSOLE
/
TO CONTROL BOX
EL. SHAFT SYSTEM
4x1,5
/
9x1,5
NOT STORK-KWANT SUPPLY
PROJ METHODE
WIRING DIAGRAM CONTROL UNIT STBD WING
STDRK-KUJANT
STORK - KWANT B V SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUDEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
U A0110083
WIJZ
GET JR
SCHAAL
DP
BLAD
2 5 - 0 4 - 0 2 GEZ
r
~i
LET.
STNR.
DD.
WIJZIGING
NAAM
CONTROL BOX EL. SHAFT SYSTEM
PCB 101250
POTENTIAL FREE CONTACTS (confaclrat-ing 0.5A/24V)
LAMP FUNCTION.
K1=WHEELHOUSE ON SERVICE
UWHEELHOUSE ON SERVICE
K2=PORT WING ON SERVICE
2=PORT WING ON SERVICE
K3=STBD WING ON SERVICE
3=STBD WING ON SERVICE
K4rSYSTEM FAILURE (contact as indicated = system failure]
4=SYSTEMOK.
K7=POWER ON
5=POTENTIOMETER FAILURE WHEELHOUSE
6=POTENTIOMETER FAILURE PORT WING
7=POTENTIOMETER FAILURE STBD WING
K7
K4
8=LINE-UP FAILURE WHEELHOUSE
FUSES
9=UNE-UP FAILURE PORT WING
2x2AT
10=UNE-UP FAILURE STBD WING
10
13 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
TO CONTROL UNIT PORT WING
BMS203
2x1,5
12
I
i DMS1M102
f
TO CONTROL UNIT WHEELHOUSE
9x1.5
61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68
TO CONTROL UNIT STBD WING
51-51
71--71
9x1.5
10x1.5
X3 DMS 2100 i
X4
CABINET
SUPPLY 24VDC (1=+
NOT STORK-KWANT SUPPLY
PROJ. METHODE
4A0111606
WIRING DIAGRAM CONTROL BOX EL SHAFT SYSTEM
STORKÏ-KUJANT
STORK - KWANT B.V. SNEEK HOLLAND
HET AUTEURSRECHT WORDT VOORBEHOUOEN OVEREENKOMSTIG DE WET
WIJZ.
GET. T T W
SCHAAL:
D.D.
BLAD.
11-08-03
GEZ. ><T
Guangzhou NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
DMS2100i/DPS2100.
Delivery Extent No. 651424-1 to 651427-1
1 st October 2004
1.1 DMS2100Î/DPS 2100 Scope of Supply-Hardware
Type number
Outline/Layout
Item
Pcs.
Designations
1.
Bridge
962.017.500
962.008.002/962.017.591
1.1
1
Bridge Panel for Bridge Control
incl. Fine Regulation of RPM
921.301.020
4A0105016B/-
1.2
1
Bridge Telegraph transmitter
921.301.120
4A0102077A/-
1.2.2
Telegraph Alarm Panel
(mounted inside console)
921.300.910
900.365.132/-
1.2.3
Buzzer for Bridge Telegraph
(inside console)
921.301.190
4A0101576A/-
1.2.4
Box for Electric Shaft Telegraph for wings
921.100.000
921.140.004/-
1.3
Emergency Stop P/B with cover
062.491.130
371.441.101/-
1.4.1
Starting Air Pressure Instrument
144 x 44mm, Illuminated
Scale:0-40 bar
088.421.163
371.421.161/-
1.4.2
Tacho Instrument
144 x 144mm, Illuminated
Scale: 150-0-150 rpm Ahead Right
991.406.800
371.181.204/-
1.4.3
Dimmer for Item 1.4.1 & 1.4.2
088.421.263
371.421.261/-
1.5.1
Tacho Instrument for Wheel House center
192 x 192mm, Illuminated
Scale: 150-0-150 rpm Ahead Right
991.406.800
371.181.204/-
1.5.2
Dimmer for Item 1.5.1
970.401.440
962.013.202/-
1.6.1
Telegraph Order Printer
Desk mounting
970.401.443
962.013.202/-
1.6.2
Printer Cable 5m
(Inside Console)
970.401.441
962.013.202/-
1.6.3
Printer Plug
(Inside Console)
921.301.040
1.7
Emergency Telegraph, transmitter
144 x144
4A0101U4/-
Page 1 of4
Lyngsø Marine A/S
Guangzhou NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
DMS2100i/DPS2100.
Delivery Extent No. 651424-1 to 651427-1
1st October 2004
Bridge Wings
STBD
088.421.463
371.421.461/-
1.8
Tacho Instrument Watertight
415x240mm, Illuminated with dimmer
Scale: 150-0-150 rpm, Ahead Right
921.301.220
4A0106390/-
1.8.1
Wing Control Panel, inclusive of:
• El. Shaft
• Take Control, push button
• Take control push button
• Emergency stop push button
921.300.910
900.365.132/-
1.8.2
Buzzer for Wing Control Panel
(inside console)
910.026.671
910.026.681/-
1.8.3
Alarm panel bridge wing
Indication lamps for:
-M/E shut down
-M/E slow down
-M/E remote control failure
-Reduce RPM main Engine
Push button for buzzer stop & buzzer
088.491.247
1.8.4
Start Air instrument 96 x 96, Illuminated
Scale: 0-4 Bar
1.8.5
Tacho Instrument 96 x 96 Illuminated.
Scale: 150-0-150 Ahead right
1.8.6
Dimmer for item 1.8.4 & 1.8.5
371.441.051/088.421.063
371.421.061/991.406.800
371.181.204/-
PORT
088.421.423
371.421.421/-
1.9
Tacho Instrument Watertight
415x240mm, Illuminated with dimmer
Scale: 150-0-150 rpm, Ahead Left
921.301.220
4A0106392/-
1.9.1
Wing Control Panel, inclusive of:
• El. Shaft
• Take Control, push button
• Take control push button
• Emergency stop push button
921.300.910
900.365.132/-
1.9.2
Buzzer for Wing Control Panel
(inside console)
910.026.671
910.026.681/-
1.9.3
Alarm panel bridge wing
Indication lamps for:
-M/E shut down
-M/E slow down
-M/E remote control failure
-Reduce RPM main Engine
-Push button for buzzer stop & buzzer
Page 2 of 4
Lyngsø Marine A/S
Guangzhou NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
DMS2100i/DPS2100.
Delivery Extent No. 651424-1 to 651427-1
1st October 2004
088.491.247
371.441.051/-
1.9.4
Start Air instrument 96 x 96 Illuminated
Scale: 0-4 Bar
088.421.023
1.9.5
Tacho Instrument 96 x 96 illuminated.
Scale: 150-0-150 Ahead left
1.9.6
Dimmer for item 1.9.4 & 1.9.5
2.
Engine Control Room
2.1
Cabinet containing Input/Output
Modules for DMS 2100i & DPS 2100
Floor mounting. MAN B&W Engine
-Output for automatic slow turning
-Start failure alarm output
3.
Console Front
962.017.500
962.008.002/962.017.591
3.1
ECR Panel for ECR Control
921.301.320
4A0104916/-
3.2
ECR Telegraph with AH & AS
Switches
088.421.143
371.421.142/-
3.3
Tacho Instrument
144 x 144 mm
Scale: 150-0-150 rpm Ahead Right
962.019.000
962.008.002/962.019.091
3.4
ECR Panel for Safety System
921.100.010
3.4.1
Set of Resistors 8k2 for Cable fail detection
062.496.002
921.200.821/-
3.5
Revolution Counter, 8 digits
Without reset.
921.242.200
921.242.293/-
3.6
ECR Indicating Panel incl. Aux. Blower
Switch and P/B and Indicating Lamps
088.440.070
371.440.071/-
3.7
Fuel Index Meter
96 x 96mm, 4-20mA
Scale: 0-100mm
088.531.228
3.8
Change over switch bridge/ECR
4.
On the Engine or in the Engine Room
921.301.420
4A0104619U-
4.1
Telegraph Receiver,
Reply type, Ahead Left
088.359.912
4A0104055/-
4.2
Telegraph Gong, 0 150mm
Wall mounting
371.421.022/991.406.800
371.181.204/-
921.244.500
910.046.901/910.046.901
921.100.031/-
Page 3 of 4
Lyngsø Marine A/S
Guangzhou NB. 03130011/12 & 04130001/2
DMS2100i/DPS2100.
Delivery Extent No. 651424-1 to 651427-1
1 st October 2004
062.486.003
900.276.348/-
4.3
Tacho Pick-up for DMS 2100
062.486.003
900.276.348/-
4.4
Tacho Pick-up for DPS 2100
814.000.006
814.000.506/-
4.5
Junction Box for item 4.3 & 4.4
5.
Sundries
970.125.212
5.1. 1
6
DMS 2100i User Manual, English
921.450.021
5.1. 2
6
DPS 2100 User Manual, English
921.244.200
921.244.204/-
5.2. 1
1
Set of spares,
DMS 2100i& DPS 2100
Page 4 of 4
Lyngsø Marine A/S
o
CM
Lyngsø Marine A/S
List of Sales and Service Agents
Stella® Automation Products
Main office:
Lyngsø Marine A/S
2, Lyngsø Allé
DK-2970 Hørsholm
Denmark
20 08 04
Telephone:
Telefax:
+45 45 16 62 00
+45 45 16 62 62
e-mail:
Website:
[email protected]
http://www.lyngsoe.com
LIST OF SALES AND SERVICE AGENTS
ARGENTINA
Mr. Angel Tamburelli
Rocamora 78
ARG-2820 Gualeguaychü ER.
Argentina
AUSTRALIA
Aqualogic Industries Pty Ltd.
31 Parkmore
St. Boondall 4034
Brisbane
Postal Address:
P. O. Box 315, Taigum4018
Brisbane
Australia
BANGLADESH
Avanti Ltd.
House-29, Road-9/A, Dhanmondi
Dhaka-1209,
Bangladesh
L YNGSØ MARINE A/S
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
e-mail
+54 3446 433429
+54 3446 433429
[email protected]
Service agent
Phone
+617 3865 4911
Fax
+61 7 3865 4977
e-mail
[email protected]
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+880 2 8112489
+880 2 8110800
TEMPAR LTDA
Rua Buenos Aires 68 80-andar
BR-20070-020 Rio de Janeiro
Brazil
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+55 21221-8666
+55 21 224-3910
Dinavi Servicos Tecnicos Ltda
Rua Haddoch Lobo 356, sala 402
20260-133 Rio de Janeiro
Brazil
Service agent
Phone
+55 212567 1144
Fax
+55 212567 5726
e-mail:
amaralm(S>,dinavi, com.br
BRAZIL
BULGARIA
Sat Star Ltd.
C-X Chaika Bl. 53 entr. 3 Ap. 62
BG-9010 Varna
Bulgaria
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+359 52 30 1627
+359 52 30 1668
Sales Agent
Phone
Fax
+56 2 698 7827
+56 2 698 7827
CHILE
Polanco & Cia Ltda.
Huerfanos 979 - Ofs. 322/23
Casilla 1403
CHL-Santiago
Chile
LiseSkovNilsson/20 08 04
L YNGSØ MARINE A/S
LIST OF SALES AND SERVICE AGENTS
CHINA
MEG Marine Electronics GmbH
Shanghai Representative Office
Rm 02/03, 20 Fl, ShenShi Motor Center
511 WeiHaiRd.
200041 Shanghai
China
Subsidiary and Service
Phone
Fax
e-mail
+86 21 6267 5666
+86 21 6215 7811
[email protected]
Hua Xing Equipment Ltd.
Room 701- 702 Lido Garden
No. 32 Huang He Road
CHI-116011 Xi Gang District DALIAN
China
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+86 411 364 5847
+86 411 364 5758
Hua Xing Equipment Ltd.
1301 Glory Hotel
808 Done Feng Done Road
CHI-510 080 Guangzhou
China
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+86 20 8765 6464
+86 20 8765 6466
Haicang Engineering & Equipment Pte
3/6C Renheng Plaza
90, Maoxing Road, Pudong
CHI-200 127 Shanghai
China
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
e-mail
+86 21 58899145
+86 21 5873 5517
[email protected]
E.T.S. - Split
Put Brodarice 2, P.O. Box 305
CRO-21000 Split
Croatia
Sales and Service agent
Phone
+385 021332 477/478
Fax
+385 021332 479
e-mail
[email protected]
M.I.E Services Ltd.
The Hawk Building
124, Gladstonos Street
CY-3032 Limassol
Cyprus
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
CROATIA
CYPRUS
Postal address:
M.I.E. Services Ltd.
P.O. Box 56952
CY-3311 Limassol
Cyprus
LiseSkovNilsson/20 08 04
+357 2534 5319
+357 2534 5639
LIST OF SALES AND SERVICE AGENTS
DENMARK
Lyngsø Marine A/S
2, Lyngsø Allé
DK-2970 Hørsholm
Denmark
Website
L YNGSØ MARINE A/S
Head office
Phone
+45 4516 6200
Fax
+45 4516 6262
e-mail
[email protected]
http://www.lyngsoe.com
FINLAND
Reference to Head Office LM-DK
FRANCE
SIMAR
3, Rue Mazanod
F-l 3002 Marseille
France
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+33 4 91 91 55 20
+33 4 9191 35 75
GERMANY
STN Schiffselektrik Gmb
Gewerbe Alle 13
D-l8107 Elmenhorst
Germany
Service agent
Phone
+49 38177 6360
Fax
+49 38177 63619
mail: susemihlfajstn-schiffselektrik de
Technical Harmony
30, Messologiou & Etollkou Str.
GR-18545 Piraeus
Greece
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+30 1 41 01 230
+30 1 41 01 199
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+852 2542 3430
+852 2542 1701
GREECE
HONG KONG
Viking Marine Supplies Ltd.
1105, Wing Tuck Centre
181, Wing Lok Street
HK-Hongkong
INDIA
P.S. LULLA & CO.
141 B. Jolly Maker Apartments No. 1
Cuffe Parade
IND-400005 BOMBAY
India
INDONESIA
P.T. U HA MARITIME JAKARTA
Jalan Kramat Jaya No. 9
Tugu, Tanjung Priok
IDA-14260 Jakarta Utara
Indonesia
Lise Skov Nilsson/ 20 08 04
Sales agent
+91 22 218 6485/1963
Phone
Fax
+91 22 218 8656
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+62 21 4401812
+62 21 4404811
LIST OF SALES AND SERVICE AGENTS
L YNGSØ MARINE A/S
IRAN
Reference to: Head Office LM-DK
ISRAEL
Radion Engineering Company Ltd.
11 - Ha'sivim St.
P.O.Box 7111
IL-49250 Petah Tikvah
Israel
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
Apss Sri
Via Palestro, 1
1-12065 Monforte d'Alba
Italy
Sales and Service agent
Phone
+39 0173 468468
Fax
+39 0173 468469
Martec S.p.A.
AEG Special Technologies
ViadelPIndustrial/3
20060 Vignate -Milan
Italy
Service agent
Phone
Fax
e-mail
+972 3 922 6688
+972 3 922 6655
ITALY
+39 02 9536 4489
+39 02 9593 8573
inartec(o),martec.it
JAPAN
Reference to Head Office, LM-DK
KUWAIT
Reference to Head Office, LM-DK
MALAYSIA
Reference to Head Office, LM-DK
NETHERLANDS
Sam Electronics Nederland B.V.
36, Ijzerwerkerkade
NL-3077 MC Rotterdam
Netherlands
Service agent
Phone
+31 10 4795 444
Fax
+31 10 4795 545
e-mail:
[email protected]
NORWAY
Reference to Head Office, LM-DK
POLAND
NCA Marine Electronic
Ul.Slaska 130
PL 81-304 Gdynia
Poland
LiseSkovNilsson/20 08 04
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+48 58 303 6386
+48 58 303 6386
LIST OF SALES AND SERVICE AGENTS
L YNGSØ MARINE A/S
\
EPA Ltd.
AI. Wojska Polskiego 154
PL-71321 Szczecin
Poland
Service agent
Phone
+48 9187 4885
Fax
+48 9187 5014
e-mail:
[email protected]
PORTUGAL
COGEMA LDA.
Av. Sidonio Pais- 28-4 DTO.
P-1000 LISBOA
Portugal
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+351 1 3556843
+351 1 3557498
Brandt Nielsen Marine (Romania) SRL
Albatros Street 1
Block M, Section 2, Apartment 34
R-6200 Galatz, Romania
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
E-Mail
+40 236 464 131
+40 236 460 204
brandtni(o),stillco.ro
ROMANIA
SAUDI ARABIA
Reference to Head Office, LM-DK
SINGAPORE
Total Automation Ltd.
45, Gul Drive, Jurong
Singapore 629492
Singapore
SOUTH AFRICA
Trivetts Electrical Services
PO Box 29026 - 2 Belfast Road
Maydon Wharf 4057
ZA-4001 Durban
South Africa
SOUTH KOREA
SAM Electronics Korea
Lyngsø Marine
Sae Sam Bldg. 8th Fl.
1485-1 Cha-dong
Haeundae-Gu
Pusan, KOREA (612-030)
SPAIN
Reference to Main Office, LM-DK
Lise Skov Nilsson/ 20 08 04
Sales and Service agent
Phone
+65 6862 1328
Fax+65 6862 1338/+65 6861 7810
E-Mail
[email protected]. sg
Service agent
Phone
Fax
+27 31 2051536
+27 31 2058419
Subsidiary and Service
Phone
Fax
e-mai!
+82 51 704 9270
+ 8251 7049276
[email protected]
LIST OF SALES AND SERVICE AGENTS
SWITZERLAND
SIMAR
3, Rue Mazenod
F-l 3002 Marseille
France
L YNGSØ MARINE A/S
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+33 4 91 91 55 20
+33 4 91 91 35 75
GENCO INTERNATIONAL INC.
6F, 2 Jen Ai Road,
Section 4 - Taipei
Taiwan
Republic of China
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+886 2 2705 1566
+886 2 2705 2166
ORMAR CO. LTD.
RaufOrbayCad.no. 31
TR-81700Tuzla- Istanbul
Turkey
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
e-mail
+90 216 395 6695
+90 216 446 2327
[email protected]
Elkon Company Ltd.
RaufOrbayCad.No. 31
81700 Tuzla
Turkey
Service agent
Phone
Fax
e-mail
+216 395 66 95
+216 446 23 30
[email protected]
UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Elcome International L.L C.
P.O.Box 1788
Al Jadaf,
Dubai
United Arab Emirates
Service agent
Phone
Fax
e-mail
+971 4324 1333
+971 4324 3465
[email protected]
UNITED KINGDOM
BOND Instrumentation and Proc. Cont. Ltd.
The Woodrope Building
Woodrolfe Road
Tollesbury, Essex CM9 8SE
United Kingdom
Sales and service agent
Phone
+441621862140
Fax
+44 162186 2141
e-mail
[email protected]
TAIWAN
TURKEY
TURKEY
Lise Skov Nilsson/ 20 08 04
LIST OF SALES AND SERVICE AGENTS
UNITED STATES
Reference to Main Office, LM-DK
L YNGSØ MARINE A/S
Sales
Radio Holland USA Inc.
8943 Gulf FreewayHouston, Texas 77017
USA
Service agent
Phone
Fax
Eugen Schmied & Associates, Inc.
Consulting Engneers
2041 MacArthur Street
Rancho Palos Verdes
CA 90275-1112
USA
Service agent
Phone
+13105 47 5487
Fax
+13105 47 3253
e-mail: eugen(5),schmiedandassoc.com
VENEZUELA
TENAVAL CA.
Calle 6- Centro Empresanal "RS"
2do. Piso 2- OfficinaNo. 23- La Ur
YV-1010-A Caracas
Venezuela
LiseSkovNilsson/20 08 04
Sales agent
Phone
Fax
+1 713 378-2100
+1 713 378-2187
+58 22424 744
+58 22426 704